C-Class
Operator’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Further, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To ensure your pleasure of
ownership, and for your safety and that of your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time:
• Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for
your reference.
• Please abide by the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
• Please abide by the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety
of the vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.
DaimlerChrysler AG
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choosing global or selective
mode on remote control ............. 33
Opening and closing windows
and sliding / pop-up roof
from outside ................................. 34
Panic button ................................. 35
Mechanical keys .......................... 35
Doors ................................................. 36
Central locking switch .................... 38
Automatic central locking .............. 39 Supplemental Restraint
Emergency unlocking
in case of accident ...................... 39 Emergency tensioning
Tailgate .............................................. 40
Opening the tailgate .................... 40
Heated seats .....................................52
Rear seat head restraints ................53
Seat belts and integrated
restraint system ..........................56
Seat belts ...........................................56
Introduction
Product information .......................... 7
Operator’s manual ............................. 8
Where to find it ................................ 13
Reporting Safety Defects ................ 15
Seat belt nonusage
warning system ...........................57
BabySmartTM airbag
Instruments and controls
deactivation system ....................64
Instruments and controls ............... 18
Door control panel .......................20
Overhead control panel ............... 21
Dashboard .....................................22
Center console ..............................24
System (SRS) ...............................65
retractor (ETR) .............................66
Airbags ..............................................67
Safety guidelines for the seat
Emergency unlocking
the tailgate .....................................41
Closing the tailgate ..................... 42
Operation
belt, emergency tensioning
retractor and airbag ....................75
Infant and child
restraint systems .........................77
Steering wheel adjustment
(electrical) ....................................83
Rear view mirrors ............................84
Instrument cluster ...........................92
Vehicle keys ......................................28
Start lock-out ....................................30 Antitheft alarm system ................... 43
General notes on the
Tow-away alarm ............................... 44
Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 45
Front seat adjustment ..................... 46
Removal and installation of
front seat head restraints .......... 50
Multicontour seat .............................51
central locking system ...............30
Central locking system ................... 31
Radio frequency and
infrared remote control ............... 31
Locking and unlocking ................33
Multifunction steering wheel,
multifunction display .................96
Contents
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
2
Trip and main odometer
Rear window wiper / washer ...... 146 Manual tuning ................................ 168
and sub menu ............................100
Audio systems ................................102
Radio ............................................102 Automatic climate control ............ 148
CD player .....................................103 Front center console storage
Cassette player ...........................104
Telephone ........................................105
Navigation system ...........................110
Trip computer ..................................111
Malfunction/warning
message memory .......................113
Individual settings ..........................115
Setting the audio volume ..............130
Hazard warning flasher
Seek tuning .....................................168
Scan tuning .....................................168
Weather Band ................................. 169
Station memory ..............................169
Storing stations automatically
(Autostore) ................................. 169
Storing stations ..............................170
Retrieving a station
switch ......................................... 147
compartment ventilation ..........159
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air outlets ................160
Operation Audio and telephone ...161
Operating safety .............................161
Operating and display elements ..162
Button and soft key operation ......164
Operation .........................................164 Cassette mode ................................170
Switching on and off ......................164 Playing cassettes ............................170
Adjusting the volume ....................165 Cassette eject .................................. 171
from memory .............................170
Direct frequency
input AM and FM only .............170
Coolant temperature gauge .......... 131
Flexible service system
(FSS) ............................................132 Audio functions ..............................165 Track selection ...............................172
Engine oil level indicator ..............135 Bass ..................................................165 Track search
forwards/backwards .................172
Fast forward/reverse .....................172
Scanning .........................................173
Scanning .........................................173
Dolby NR 1
Engine oil consumption ................136 Treble ...............................................165
Exterior lamp switch .....................137 Balance .............................................166
Headlamp mode .............................138 Centering all audio functions .......166
Night security illumination .........140 Audio system tone level selection 167
Locator lighting .......................... 141 Radio mode ......................................167
Headlamp cleaning system .......... 141 Selecting radio mode .....................167
Combination switch ......................142 Selecting the band .........................167
noise reduction system ............173
CD mode .......................................... 174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General notes on CD mode ........... 174 Searching and selecting
Interior ............................................194
Storage compartments
phone book entries
CD changer installed .....................175
by number ..................................180
Placing a call ...................................180
Manual repeat dialing
(redial) .........................................181
Automatic repeat dialing
(redial) .........................................181
Speed dialing ..................................181
Turbo-dialing ..................................182
Multi party call ...............................182
Accepting incoming call
and armrests ..............................194
Glove box .....................................195
Loading/emptying
the CD magazine .......................175
Playing CDs .................................... 176
Cup holder ...................................... 198
Ashtrays ..........................................200
Lighter .............................................202
Parcel net in
front passenger footwell ..........203
Ski sack ...........................................203
Parcel net in trunk ........................208
Electrical outlet ..............................209
Storage compartment
Skipping tracks
forward/backward .................... 176
Fast forward/reverse .....................177
Scanning .........................................177
Random play/repeat function ......177
Direct track selection ....................178
Track and time display .................178
Telephone operation ......................178
Switching the telephone
on and off ...................................178
Adjusting the volume ....................179
Entering telephone number and
starting dialing process ...........179
Calling up the phone book ...........179
Switching between
name search and
in telephone mode .....................182
Accepting incoming call
under trunk floor ......................209
Retractable luggage cover
in tape, CD or radio mode ........182
Terminating call .............................183
Muting a call ...................................183
Component malfunctions ..............183
Power windows ...............................185
and partition net ....................... 210
Split rear bench seat ..................... 213
Loading instructions ..................... 217
Cargo tie-down rings ..................... 218
Cellular telephone ......................... 219
Telephone, general ........................220
Garage door opener .......................221
Sliding/pop-up roof ........................188
Interior lighting ..............................191
number search ..........................179 Sun visors ........................................193
Vanity mirrors ................................193
Contents
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
4
Snow chains ............................... 259
Winter driving
instructions ................................ 260
Deep water ..................................262
Passenger compartment ........... 263
Traveling abroad ........................ 263
Cruise control ................................ 264
Brake assist system (BAS) ............ 267
Antilock brake system
(ABS) ..........................................268
Electronic stability program
(ESP) ........................................... 270
What you should know
at the gas station .......................274
Check regularly and
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) indicator lamp ..................281
Fuel reserve warning .................282
ABS malfunction
indicator lamp .............................283
Electronic stability program
(ESP) — warning lamp ...............284
Seat belt nonusage
warning lamp ............................284
Malfunction and indicator
lamp in the center console ......284
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp .....284
Malfunction and warning
messages in the
Driving
Control and operation of
radio transmitters .....................226
The first 1 000 miles
(1 500 km) .................................227
Maintenance ...................................227
Tele Aid ...........................................228
Catalytic converter ........................238
Emission control ............................239
Starter switch .................................240
Starting and turning off
the engine ..................................242
Automatic transmission ...............243
Parking brake .................................252
Driving instructions ......................253
Drive sensibly – Save Fuel ........253
Drinking and driving .................253
Pedals ...........................................253
Power assistance ........................254
Brakes ..........................................254
Driving off ...................................255
Parking ........................................256
Tires .............................................257
multifunction display ...............285
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE ................287
BATTERY / ALTERNATOR ........288
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ....289
BRAKE ASSIST ...........................289
BRAKE PAD WEAR ....................290
BRAKE FLUID .............................290
PARKING BRAKE .......................291
SEAT BELT SYSTEM ...................291
before a long trip .......................276
Instrument cluster display
Malfunction and indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster ............. 278
On-board diagnostic system ........278
Check engine malfunction
indicator lamp ............................278
Brake warning lamp .................. 280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELEC. STABIL. PROG.
(Electronic stability program) ..292
COOLANT
(coolant level) .............................293
COOLANT
Spare wheel ....................................323
Spare wheel bolts .......................323
Changing wheels ...........................324
Tire inflation pressure ..................329
Battery .............................................330
Jump starting ..................................332
Towing the vehicle .........................335
Transmission selector lever,
manually unlocking ...................338
Exterior lamps ................................339
Replacing bulbs ..........................339
Standby bulb function ...................345
Changing batteries in the
electronic main key ..................346
Synchronizing
Practical hints
First aid kit ..................................... 306
Stowing things in the vehicle ...... 307
Fuses ...............................................307
Hood .................................................311
Adding engine oil ...........................314
Automatic transmission
fluid level ....................................315
Coolant level ....................................315
Adding coolant ............................316
Windshield and headlamp
(coolant temperature) ................294
ENGINE OIL LEVEL ...................295
STEERING GEAR OIL .................296
LIGHTING SYSTEM ....................297
LAMP SENSOR ...........................299
DOOR ............................................299
TRUNK OPEN .............................300
HOOD ...........................................300
TELEPHONE – FUNCTION .......301
TELE AID .....................................301
WASHER FLUID ..........................302
RESTRAINT SYSTEM .................303
KEY ...............................................303
FUEL RESERVE ..........................304
UNDERVOLTAGE ........................304
washer system ...........................316
Spare wheel,
storage compartment ................318
Vehicle tools ....................................319
Vehicle jack ....................................320
Wheels ............................................ 321
Tire replacement ....................... 321
Rotating wheels ......................... 322
remote control ............................348
Emergency engine shut-down .....348
Fuel filler flap, manual release ...349
Replacing wiper blade insert .......351
Roof rack .........................................352
Contents
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
6
Leather upholstery .................... 359
Hard plastic trim items ............. 359
Plastic and rubber parts ........... 359
Vehicle care
Index
Cleaning and care of the vehicle .354
Index ................................................376
Power washer ..............................355
Tar stains .....................................355
Paintwork, painted body
Technical data
Spare parts service .......................362
Warranty coverage ........................ 362
Identification labels ......................363
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ........... 364
Technical data ................................ 365
components .................................355
Engine cleaning ..........................356
Vehicle washing .........................356
Ornamental moldings ................357
Headlamps, taillamps,
turn signal lenses ......................357
Window cleaning ........................357
Wiper blade .................................357
Light alloy wheels ......................358
Instrument cluster .....................358
Steering wheel and
gear selector lever ......................358
Cup holder ...................................358
Seat belts .....................................359
Headliner and
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. -
capacities ...................................368
Engine oils ...................................... 370
Engine oil additives ......................370
Air conditioner refrigerant ..........370
Brake fluid ...................................... 370
Premium unleaded gasoline .........371
Fuel requirements .........................371
Gasoline additives ......................... 372
Coolants ..........................................372
Consumer information ..................374
Uniform tire quality grading ........374
shelf below rear window ...........359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product information
Kindly observe the following in your own best interest:
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories
explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and their special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible
for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other
agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance
or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them.
Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on
permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.
Introduction
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
8
Operator’s manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize
yourself with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings
contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations
for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment,
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
• New Car Limited Warranty,
• Emission System Warranty,
• Emission Performance Warranty,
• California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont only),
• State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important notice for California retail buyers of Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease
price, if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ore more substantial
defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair
attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles on
the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail
buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a
condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has
been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the
need for its repair and have given us a direct opportunity to perform a repair ourselves, (2) the same substantial defect
or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have
directly notified us of the need for its repair and given us the opportunity to repair ourselves, or (3) the vehicle is out
of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of
more than 30 calender days. Written notification should be sent to us, not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Customer Assistance Center, One Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
Maintenance
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.
Introduction
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
10
Roadside assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown.
Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box.
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can
contact you should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and
Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
• Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available,
• unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage
the catalysts,
• gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details,
consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:
In the USA:
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Introduction
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
12
We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make
changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual
might differ from your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they
are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your
vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to find it
The Operator’s Manual is divided into eight sections:
• Instruments and controls: An overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat.
• Operation: Information on the vehicle’s equipment and its operation.
• Driving: Important information on driving.
• Instrument cluster display: Displays and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster with brief instructions.
• Practical hints: Assistance and instructions in the event of an emergency.
• Car care: Instructions on caring for your vehicle.
• Technical data: All the important technical data for your vehicle as well as consumer information such as fuels,
coolants, lubricants etc. is contained here.
• Index: Key terms to help you find a topic quickly.
Other documents may also be supplied, depending on your vehicle’s equipment.
Explanation of color used:
Warning notices for the protection of yourself and
others appear on red background.
Introduction
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
14
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect
its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your
satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if
necessary contact us at the following addresses:
In the USA: Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Introduction
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls ............... 18
Door control panel .......................20
Overhead control panel ............... 21
Dashboard .....................................22
Center console ..............................24
Contents - Instruments and controls
17
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls
18
P68.10-2583-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Door control panel, see page 20
3 Dashboard, see page 22
2 Overhead control panel, see page 21
4 Center console, see page 24
Instruments and controls
19
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Instruments and controls
Door control panel
20
1 Door handle, pull to open, see page 36
2 Memory function (for storing seat, steering wheel
and exterior rear view mirror settings), see page 89
3 Front seat adjustment switch, see page 46
4 Steering wheel adjustment switch, see page 83
5 Power window switch, see page 185
6 Switch for rear door window override, see page 185
and 187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overhead control panel
1 Interior lighting, see page 191
2 Tele Aid cover (emergency call system), see
page 228
3 Sliding/pop-up roof, see page 188
4 Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid and optional
telephone with voice recognition system
5 Rear view mirror, see page 84
6 Garage door opener, see page 221
Instruments and controls
21
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Instruments and controls
Dashboard
22
10
11
8
9
6
7
13
14
5
12
P68.10-2493-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hood lock release, see page 311
9 Multifunction steering wheel, see page 96
Horn (with electronic key in starter switch
position 1 or 2)
2 Parking brake pedal, see page 252
3 Parking brake release, see page 252
4 Exterior lamp switch, see page 137
5 Combination switch, see page 142
6 Exterior mirror adjustment switch, see page 85
7 Headlamp washer button, see page 141
8 Cruise control switch, see page 264
10 Instrument cluster, see page 92
11 Voice recognition system switch, see separate
operating instructions
12 Starter switch, see page 240
13 Glove box lid release, see page 195
14 Glove box lock, see page 195
Instruments and controls
23
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Instruments and controls
Center console
24
1 Left front seat heater switch, see page 52
2 Rear window wiper/washer, see page 146
3 ESP (electronic stability program) control switch,
see page 270
4 Hazard warning flasher switch, see page 147
5 Central locking switch, see page 38
6 Antitheft alarm system, see page 43
Switch for tow-away protection, see page 44
7 Right front seat heater switch, see page 52
8 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp, see page 284
9 COMAND system (optional), see separate
operating instructions, or
audio system, see page 161
10 Automatic climate control, see page 148
Rear window defroster, see page 158
11 Ashtray, see page 200
12 Automatic transmission, see page 243
13 Storage compartment, see page 196
14 Armrest, see page 196
Storage compartment, see page 202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Contents - Operation
26
Emergency unlocking
Safety guidelines for the seat
belt, emergency tensioning
retractor and airbag ....................75
Infant and child
restraint systems .........................77
Steering wheel adjustment
Operation
the tailgate .....................................41
Closing the tailgate ..................... 42
Antitheft alarm system ................... 43
Tow-away alarm ............................... 44
Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 45
Front seat adjustment ..................... 46
Removal and installation of
front seat head restraints .......... 50
Multicontour seat .............................51
Heated seats ..................................... 52
Rear seat head restraints ............... 53
Seat belts and integrated
restraint system .......................... 56
Seat belts .......................................... 56
Seat belt nonusage
Vehicle keys ......................................28
Start lock-out ....................................30
General notes on the
central locking system ...............30
Central locking system ................... 31
Radio frequency and
infrared remote control ............... 31
Locking and unlocking ................33
Choosing global or selective
(electrical) ....................................83
Rear view mirrors ............................84
Instrument cluster ...........................92
Multifunction steering wheel,
multifunction display .................96
Trip and main odometer
mode on remote control ..............33
Opening and closing windows
and sliding / pop-up roof
and sub menu ............................100
Audio systems ................................102
Radio ............................................102
CD player .....................................103
Cassette player ...........................104
Telephone ........................................105
Navigation system ...........................110
Trip computer ..................................111
from outside ..................................34
Panic button ..................................35
Mechanical keys ...........................35
Doors ..................................................36
Central locking switch ....................38
Automatic central locking ..............39
Emergency unlocking
in case of accident ......................39
Tailgate ..............................................40
Opening the tailgate ....................40
warning system .......................... 57
BabySmartTM airbag
deactivation system ................... 64
Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) ............................... 65 Malfunction/warning
Emergency tensioning
retractor (ETR) ............................ 66 Individual settings ..........................115
Airbags .............................................. 67 Setting the audio volume .............130
message memory .......................113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coolant temperature gauge .......... 131 Operation Audio and telephone ...161 Parcel net in
front passenger footwell ..........203
Ski sack ...........................................203
Parcel net in trunk ........................208
Electrical outlet ..............................209
Storage compartment
under trunk floor ......................209
Retractable luggage cover
Flexible service system
(FSS) ............................................132
Engine oil level indicator ..............135
Operating safety .............................161
Operating and display elements ..162
Button and soft key operation ......164
Operation .........................................164
Component malfunctions ..............183
Power windows ...............................185
Sliding/pop-up roof ........................188
Interior lighting ..............................191
Sun visors ........................................193
Vanity mirrors ................................193
Interior .............................................194
Storage compartments
and armrests ..............................194
Glove box ......................................195
Cup holder .......................................198
Ashtrays ..........................................200
Lighter ............................................. 202
Engine oil consumption ................136
Exterior lamp switch .....................137
Headlamp mode .............................138
Night security illumination .........140
Locator lighting .......................... 141
Headlamp cleaning system .......... 141
Combination switch ......................142
Rear window wiper / washer .......146
Hazard warning flasher
switch ..........................................147
Automatic climate control ............148
Front center console storage
compartment ventilation .........159
Rear passenger compartment
and partition net ....................... 210
Split rear bench seat ..................... 213
Loading instructions ..................... 217
Cargo tie-down rings ..................... 218
Cellular telephone ......................... 219
Telephone, general ........................220
Garage door opener .......................221
adjustable air outlets ................160
Contents - Operation
27
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Warning!
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Vehiclekeys
28
Included with your vehicle are 2 electronic keys with
integrated radio frequency and infrared remote controls
plus removable mechanical key.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch, and lock
your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
serious personal injury.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two electronic keys are a different color to help
distinguish it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic key
When using the mechanical key (2) for lock operations,
it can be removed by sliding it out of the remote control.
To do so, move locking tab (3) to the right and slide the
mechanical key (2) in direction of arrow (4).
The remote control transmitter is located in the
electronic key.
1
The infrared receivers are located in the front door
handles.
Note:
3
Remove the mechanical key from the electronic key
when using valet parking service. To prevent access to
storage compartments lock them separately and retain
the mechanical key.
2
4
P80.35-2030-26
The electronic key has an integrated radio frequency
and infrared remote control, plus removable mechanical
key.
See page 41 for separate locking of tailgate and page 195
for locking of glove box.
Obtaining replacement keys
The remote control (1) operates all locks on the vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a theft deterrent locking
system requiring a special key manufacturing process.
For security reasons, replacement keys can only be
obtained from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The mechanical key (2) works only in the driver’s door,
tailgate, and glove box lock.
Central locking system
29
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Start lock-out
30
General notes on the central locking system
If the electronic key is inserted in the starter switch, the
vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote
control.
Important!
Removing the electronic key from the starter switch
activates the start lock-out. The engine cannot be
started.
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked:
• Aim transmitter eye at a receiver of either front door
handle. Check the batteries of the electronic key, see
page 346, or synchronize the electronic key, see
page 348.
Inserting the electronic key in the starter switch
deactivates the start lock-out.
Note:
• Use the mechanical key to unlock the vehicle. To
start engine, insert the electronic key in the starter
switch. There could be a slight delay until the
electronic key can be turned in the starter switch.
In case the engine cannot be started (vehicle’s battery is
in order), the system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-
MERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Important!
When unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will
sound.
To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Central locking system
4
Radio frequency and infrared remote control
3
The electronic key has an integrated radio frequency
and infrared remote control.
2
1
Due to the extended operational range of the remote
control, it could be possible to unintentionally lock or
unlock the vehicle by pressing the transmit button. If
one of the transmit buttons is pressed, the battery check
lamp lights up briefly – indicating that the batteries are
in order. See page 346 for checking batteries.
5
P80.35-2033-26
The vehicle doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap can be
centrally locked and unlocked via remote control.
1 Transmit button
‹ Locking
Opening and closing the windows and sliding/pop-up
roof can only be done with the infrared portion of the
remote control. Aim transmitter eye at a receiver (6
or 7), press and hold transmit button Œ or ‹,
see page 34.
ΠUnlocking
2 Lamp for battery check (see page 346 for changing
batteries if it does not light up briefly)
If the electronic key is inserted in starter switch, the
vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked.
3 PANIC button
4 Transmitter eye
5 Locking tab for mechanical key
Central locking system
31
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
32
6
7
P80.30-2139-26
P80.30-2140-26
6 Infrared receiver in driver’s door handle
7 Infrared receiver in front passenger door handle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locking and unlocking with remote control
If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the remote
control, neither door or tailgate is opened, the electronic
key is not inserted in the starter switch, or the central
locking switch is not activated, the vehicle will
automatically lock.
Unlocking:
Press transmit button Œ. All turn signal lamps blink
once to indicate that the vehicle is unlocked.
The remote control can be programmed for two kinds of
unlocking modes (see below):
Locking:
Press transmit button ‹ once. All turn signal lamps
blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked. If
they do not blink three times, a door or tailgate is not
properly closed.
Selective unlocking mode –
Press transmit button Œ once to unlock driver’s door
and fuel filler flap.
Press transmit button Πtwice to unlock all doors,
fuel filler flap, and tailgate.
Note:
Global unlocking mode –
Press transmit button Πonce to unlock all doors,
fuel filler flap, and tailgate.
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing
the transmit button, then it may be necessary to change
the batteries in the electronic key (if ok, battery check
lamp in electronic key will light briefly when pressing
transmit button) or to synchronize the remote control,
see pages 346 and 348.
Notes:
If the tailgate was previously locked separately, it will
remain locked, see page 41.
Choosing global or selective mode on remote control
The presently active unlocking mode (selective or
global) can only be determined by unlocking the vehicle
with the remote control (see below for changing mode).
Press and hold transmit buttons ‹ and Œ
simultaneously for five seconds to reprogram the
remote control. Battery check lamp will blink two times
indicating the completed mode change.
Central locking system
33
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
34
Opening and closing windows and
sliding/pop-up roof from outside
(summer opening/convenience feature)
To interrupt closing procedure, release transmit button.
Ensure that all side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle.
Aim transmitter eye of remote control at the door
receiver.
Warning!
Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof
if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed
by the opening or closing procedure.
Summer opening:
The sliding/pop-up roof and all side windows can be
opened automatically.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the
procedure can be immediately halted by releasing
the remote control button. To reverse direction of
movement press Œ for opening or ‹ for
closing.
Continue to press transmit button Πafter unlocking
the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to open
after approximately 1 second.
To interrupt opening procedure, release transmit
button.
Note:
If the windows and sliding/pop-up roof cannot be
operated automatically by pressing the transmit button
of the remote control then it may be necessary to change
the batteries in the electronic key (if ok, battery check
lamp in electronic key will light briefly when
transmitting), or to synchronize the remote control, see
page 346 and 348.
Convenience feature:
The sliding/pop-up roof and the side windows can be
closed.
Continue to press transmit button ‹ after locking
the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof begin to close
after approximately 1 second.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panic button
Note:
For operation in the USA only: This device complies
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Mechanical keys
P80.35-2034-26
The mechanical keys work only in driver’s door, tailgate,
and glove box locks.
To activate press and hold button (1) for at least one
second. An audible alarm and blinking exterior lamps
will operate for approximately 3 minutes.
Notes:
To deactivate press button (1) again, or insert electronic
key in starter switch.
The mechanical key does not operate the central locking
system or antitheft alarm system.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with
the mechanical key.
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 349.
Central locking system
35
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Doors
36
4
5
2
3
1
1 Opening – pull handle
4 Individual door from inside:
Push lock button down to lock.
2 Unlocking driver’s door
5 Front door from inside:
3 Locking driver’s door
Pull handle to unlock.
Important!
When you lock the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the door lock button should move down.
The mechanical key does not operate the central locking
system or antitheft alarm system.
Each individual door must be locked with the respective
door lock button – the driver’s door can only be locked
when it is closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has previously been locked from the
outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the
alarm. When opening a front door while the central
locking system is in the:
To unlock, pull inside door handles or turn mechanical
key in driver’s door lock to position 2.
Rear doors can only be opened from inside by first
pulling up the door lock button.
• selective unlocking mode, only that individual door
is unlocked. The remaining doors, the tailgate and
fuel filler flap remain locked.
When unlocking the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will
sound.
• global unlocking mode, all doors, the tailgate and
To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic key.
fuel filler flap are unlocked.
Notes:
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system
the doors can be locked and unlocked individually.
To lock, push down lock buttons or turn mechanical key
in driver’s door lock to position 3. In addition lock the
tailgate.
Central locking system
37
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Central locking switch
38
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central
locking switch, while in the global remote control mode,
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened
from the inside.
Notes:
If the vehicle was previously locked with the remote
control, the doors and tailgate cannot be unlocked with
the central locking switch.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with
the central locking switch.
If the vehicle has previously been locked from the
outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the
alarm. To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in
the starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic key.
P54.25-2499-26
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
Warning!
The central locking switch is located in the center
console.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch, and lock
your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
serious personal injury.
The doors and tailgate can only be locked with the
central locking switch, if both front doors are closed.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central
locking switch, while in the selective remote control
mode, only the door opened from the inside is unlocked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic central locking
Important!
With the automatic central locking system activated, the
doors and tailgate are locked at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The fuel filler
flap remains unlocked.
When towing the vehicle, or with the vehicle on a
dynamometer test stand, please, note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and the
electronic key in starter switch position 2, the vehicle
doors will lock if the left front wheel as well as the right
rear wheel spin at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
The automatic central locking function can be switched
on or off in the individual setting menu “VEHICLE” –
“AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK”, see page 115.
Notes:
Emergency unlocking in case of accident
If doors are unlocked with the central locking switch
after activating the automatic central locking, and
neither door is opened, then the doors remain unlocked
even at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more.
The doors unlock automatically a short time after an
accident in which an airbag or emergency tensioning
retractor deploys (this is intended to aid rescue and
exit).
If a door is opened from the inside at speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less with the
automatic central locking activated, the door will again
be automatically locked at speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Central locking system
39
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Tailgate
40
Opening the tailgate
The handle is located above the rear license plate
recess.
The tailgate can be opened if the vehicle was previously
centrally unlocked.
To open tailgate, pull grip.
Important!
The tailgate swings open upwards, you should always
make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance!
Important!
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system,
the locked tailgate can be unlocked with the mechanical
key, see page 41.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency unlocking the tailgate
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system
the locked tailgate can be unlocked individually.
To unlock, turn mechanical key in lock to position 1,
hold and pull handle to open.
When opening the tailgate completely, always make sure
that there is sufficient overhead clearance.
The mechanical key does not operate the central locking
system or antitheft alarm system.
When opening the tailgate after emergency unlocking,
the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound.
To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
steering lock or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic key.
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 349.
1 Unlocking – turn mechanical key in lock to
position 1, hold and pull handle to open
Central locking system
41
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Warning!
Car care
Index
Central locking system
Closing the tailgate
42
To prevent possible personal injury, always keep
hands and fingers away from the tailgate opening
when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful
when small children are around.
To prevent personal injury, never activate the
closing assist mechanism by tampering with the
tailgate latch.
In case the closing procedure causes potential
danger, the closing procedure can be immediately
halted by pulling the outside recessed handle.
Important!
Only drive with the tailgate closed as otherwise exhaust
fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
To close tailgate, pull down on grip (1) and swing
tailgate closed.
The rear compartment lamp will be switched off by the
contact switch only if the tailgate is fully closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antitheft alarm system
Operation:
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior
vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when
someone:
• opens a door,
• opens the tailgate,
• opens the hood,
• attempts to raise the vehicle.
The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of
flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the
activating element (a door, for example) is immediately
closed. If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds,
an emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele
Aid on page 228.
P54.25-2500-26
1 Indicator lamp in switch located in center console
The antitheft alarm is automatically armed or disarmed
with the remote control by locking or unlocking the
vehicle.
Notes:
When you unlock the driver’s door with the mechanical
key, the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will
sound.
The antitheft alarm is armed within approximately
10 seconds after locking the vehicle.
A blinking lamp (1) indicates that the alarm is armed.
To cancel the alarm, insert the electronic key in the
starter switch or press button Œ or ‹ on the
electronic key.
Antitheft alarm system
43
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Tow-away alarm
44
Tow-away alarm
The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of
flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the
vehicle is immediately lowered. To cancel the alarm,
insert the electronic key in the starter switch or press
button Œ or ‹ on the electronic key.
If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an
emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid
on page 228.
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch
off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or
when parking on a surface subject to movement, such
as a ferry or auto train.
P54.25-2520-26
To do so, turn electronic key in starter switch to
position 1 or 0, or remove electronic key from starter
switch. Press tow-away alarm switch (1). The indicator
lamp (2) illuminates briefly.
The switch is located in the center console.
1 Press to switch off tow-away alarm
Exit vehicle, and lock vehicle with the electronic key.
2 Indicator lamp
The tow-away alarm remains switched off until the
vehicle is locked again with the electronic key, at which
time it is automatically reactivated.
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior
vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy-entry/exit feature
(only vehicles with memory function)
Warning!
You must ensure that no one can become trapped
or injured by the moving steering wheel when the
easy-entry/exit feature is activated and the
driver’s door is being opened or the electronic key
removed from the starter switch. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause serious personal injury.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering
wheel tilts upwards and the driver’s seat moves
rearwards.
This allows easier entry into and exit from the vehicle
when the driver’s door is opened. However, the engine
must be turned off.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be switched on or off in
the individual setting menu “CONVENIENCE” –
“EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE”, see page 128.
When the electronic key is inserted in the starter switch
and the driver’s door is closed, the steering wheel and
the driver’s seat return to the last position set for it.
Easy-entry/exit feature
45
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Seats
46
Front seat adjustment
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch, and lock
your vehicle.
The power seats can also be operated with the
driver’s or front passenger door open. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause serious personal injury.
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back
reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position
can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat
belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt
would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat back
and seat belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in an upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
To operate the front power seat adjustment switches,
turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2 (with respective front door open, the power seats
can also be operated with the electronic key removed or
in starter switch position 0).
Never place hands under seat or near any moving
parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power seat
2 Seat adjustment, fore/aft
Press the switch (fore/aft direction) until a
comfortable seating position is reached that still
allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal
safely. The position should be as far rearward as
possible, consistent with ability to properly operate
controls.
3 Seat cushion tilt
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until
your legs are lightly supported.
4 Backrest tilt
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until
your arms are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
5 Head restraint
The switches are located in each front door.
The height of the head restraint is adjusted
automatically with the seat so that the back of the
head is supported approximately at ear level. Adjust
the head restraint using the switch to support the
back of your head approximately at ear level.
We recommend to adjust the power seat in the following
order:
1 Seat, up/down
Press the switch (up/down direction) until
comfortable seating position with still sufficient
headroom is reached.
For exterior rear view mirrors, see page 85;
inside rear view mirror, see page 84;
steering wheel adjustment, see page 83.
Seats
47
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Seats
48
Storing seat positions:
The head restraint, steering wheel and exterior rear
view mirror position are stored together with the seat
position.
See page 89 for notes on the memory function. For
recalling a stored seat/head restraint/steering wheel/
and exterior rear view mirror position see page 90.
Adjust the head restraint angle by hand. Push or pull
the head restraint in direction of arrow.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important!
Warning!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check
and adjust if necessary the seat height, seat position
fore and aft, and backrest angle to insure adequate
control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should
also be adjusted for proper height. See also airbag
section on page 67 for proper seat positioning.
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger
side front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury can result.
In addition, also adjust the steering wheel to ensure
adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the
inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted
for adequate rearward vision.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Infants and small children must ride in back seats
and be seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system, which is properly secured with
the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be
seated in a properly secured restraint system that
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view
mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts
should be done before the vehicle is put into motion.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.
Seats
49
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Seats
50
Removal and installation of front seat head
restraints
Note:
Tilt the backrest rearward for easier removal and
installation of the head restraints.
Power seat
To remove:
Press switch (1) upwards and hold until the head
restraint is fully extended. Pull head restraint out.
To install:
Press switch (1) upwards and hold for about 5 seconds.
Press the head restraint down until it engages.
Adjust head restraint to the desired position.
Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the
head approximately at ear level.
Caution!
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to help
reduce injuries during an accident.
Do not remove head restraints except when mounting
seat covers. Whenever restraints have been removed be
sure to reinstall them before driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multicontour seat (optional)
Some models may be equipped with driver’s
multicontour seat. These seats have movable seat
cushions and inflatable air cushions built into the
backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement and amount of backrest
cushion height and curvature can be continuously
varied with regulators (1, 2 and 3) after turning the
electronic key in starter switch to position 2.
The side bolsters of the backrest can be adjusted with
rocker switch (4):
• press to the left –
increase side support,
• press to the right –
decrease side support.
We recommend to adjust the multicontour seat in the
following order:
If the engine is turned off, the last cushion setting is
retained in memory, and automatically adjusts the
cushion to this setting when the engine is restarted.
1 Seat cushion depth
2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Side bolster adjustment
Seats
51
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Seats
52
Heated seats (optional)
Press switch to turn on seat heater:
1 Normal seat heating mode. One indicator lamp in
the switch lights up.
2 Rapid seat heating mode. Both indicator lamps in
the switch light up. After approximately 5 minutes
in the rapid seat heating mode, the seat heater
automatically switches to normal operation and only
one indicator lamp will stay on.
Turning off seat heater:
If one indicator lamp is on, press upper half of switch.
If both indicator lamps are on, press lower half of
switch.
P54.25-2501-26
The front seat heaters can be switched on with the
electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2.
If left on, the seat heater automatically turns off after
approximately 30 minutes of operation.
The switch is located in the center console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
Rear seat head restraints
When in operation, the seat heater consumes a large
amount of electrical power. It is not advisable to use the
seat heater longer than necessary.
The seat heaters may automatically switch off if too
many power consumers are switched on at the same
time, or if the battery charge is low. When this occurs,
the indicator lamp in the switch will blink (both
indicator lamps blink during rapid seat heating mode).
The seat heaters will switch on again automatically as
soon as sufficient voltage is available.
If the blinking of the indicator lamps is distracting to
you, the seat heaters can be switched off.
P91.16-2110-26
Folding head restraints back in the rear passenger
compartment:
Push lock button (1). The head restraints will fold
backward.
Seats
53
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Important!
Car care
Index
Seats
54
Place head restraints upright
For safety reasons, always drive with the rear head
restraints in the upright position when the rear seats
are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles
(e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the folding operation of
the head restraints.
P91.16-2111-26
Placing head restraints upright:
Pull the head restraint forward until it locks into
position.
Angle of head restraints:
Two different head restraint angle positions are
available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head restraint height
Raising:
Pull up on head restraint.
Lowering:
Push button (2) and push down on head restraint.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head
approximately at ear level. The head restraint
inclination can also be adjusted manually.
Note:
The center rear seat head restraint cannot be adjusted
or removed.
Seats
55
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Warning!
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
56
Seat belts and integrated restraint system
Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts for all seats,
emergency tensioning retractors for all outboard seat
belts, dual front airbags, door mounted side impact
airbags, and head protective window curtain airbags.
Their protective functions are designed to complement
one another.
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger
side front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury will result.
Seat belts
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Infants and small children must ride in back seats
and be seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system, which is properly secured with
the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Important!
Laws in most states and all Canadian provinces require
seat belt use.
All states and provinces require use of child restraints
that comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.
All child restraints systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap-shoulder belt.
For your safety and that of your passengers we strongly
recommend their use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat belt nonusage warning system
Warning!
With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, a
warning sounds for a short time if the driver’s seat belt
is not fastened.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest
reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position
can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat
belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt
would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in an upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Automatic comfort-fit seat belt:
An automatic comfort-fit feature for driver and front
passenger seat belt is activated when the electronic key
in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or 2.
The retraction force of the inertia reel is reduced,
increasing the level of seat belt comfort.
Note:
For cleaning and care of the seat belts see page 359.
Restraint systems
57
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Warning!
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
58
Warning!
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position
your seat belt greatly increases your risk of
injuries and their likely severity in an accident.
You and your passengers should always wear seat
belts.
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there
are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in
the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate
seat belt.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be
considerably more severe without your seat belt
properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled,
you are much more likely to hit the interior of the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death
is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fastening seat belts
The lap belt should be positioned as low as possible on
your hips and not across the abdomen.
Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
Always make sure your passengers are properly
restrained – even those sitting in the rear.
Tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder
portion up.
The shoulder portion of the seat belt must be pulled
snug and checked for snugness immediately after
engaging it.
Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as
close as possible to the middle of your shoulder (it
should not touch the neck). For this purpose, you can
adjust the height of the belt outlet.
1 Latch plate
2 Buckle
3 Release button
Push latch plate (1) into buckle (2) until it clicks. Do not
twist the belt. A twisted seat belt may cause injury.
Restraint systems
59
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
60
4 Seatbelt height adjustment - front seats: Button for
1 Seatbelt height adjustment - rear seats, left and
belt outlet height adjustment
right: Button for belt outlet height adjustment.
There are four separate positions.
To raise, slide belt outlet upward.
To lower, press button (4) and slide belt outlet
downward.
To raise, slide belt outlet upward.
To lower, press button (1) and slide belt outlet
downward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation of seat belts
Warning!
The inertia reel stops the belt from unwinding during
sudden stops or when quickly pulling on the belt.
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY.
• Seat belts can only work when used properly.
Never wear seat belts in any other way than as
described in this section, as that could result
in serious injuries in case of an accident.
The locking function of the reel may be checked by
quickly pulling out the belt.
Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as
close as possible to the middle of your shoulder (it
should not touch the neck).
• Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all
times, because seat belts help reduce the
likelihood of and potential severity of injuries
in accidents, including rollovers. The
Caution!
integrated restraint system includes “SRS”
(driver airbag, front passenger airbag, side
impact airbags, head protection window
curtain airbags for side windows), “ETR” (seat
belt emergency tensioning retractors), and
front seat knee bolsters. The system is
For safety reasons, avoid adjusting the seat or seat back
into positions which could affect the correct seat belt
positioning.
Unfastening of seat belts
designed to enhance the protection offered to
properly belted occupants in certain frontal
(front airbags) and side (side impact and
window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed
preset deployment thresholds.
Press release button (3) in the belt buckle (2).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by
guiding the latch plate (1).
Restraint systems
61
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
62
• Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm,
against your neck or off your shoulder. In a
crash, your body would move too far forward.
That would increase the chance of head and
neck injuries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen, which
could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
• Pregnant women should also use a lap-
shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be
positioned as low as possible on the hips to
avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
• Never place your feet on the instrument panel
or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the
floor in front of the seat.
• Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might
cause injuries.
• Position the lap belt as low as possible on your
hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is
positioned across your abdomen, it could cause
serious injuries in a crash.
• Each seat belt should never be used for more
than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or
other objects.
• Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash,
you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to
manage impact forces. The twisted belt against
your body could cause injuries.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning!
Children too big for child restraint systems must
ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or
neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning.
USE CHILD RESTRAINTS PROPERLY.
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger
front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Infants and small children must ride in the back
seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or
child restraint system, which is properly secured
with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.
Restraint systems
63
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Warning!
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
64
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system
Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed
for use with the Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for
use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.
With the special child seat properly installed, the
passenger front airbag will not deploy.
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will
ONLY work with a special child seat designed to
operate with it. It will not work with child seats
which are not BabySmartTM compatible.
Never place anything between seat cushion and
child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the
effectiveness of the deactivation system. The
bottom of the child seat must make full contact
with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly
mounted child seat could cause injuries to the
child in case of an accident instead of protecting
the child.
The ü indicator lamp located in the center console
will be illuminated, except with electronic key removed
or in starter switch position 0. The system does not
deactivate the door mounted side impact airbag.
Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat
installed
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
After turning electronic key in starter switch to
position 1 or 2, the ü indicator lamp located in the
center console comes on for approximately 6 seconds
and then extinguishes.
The passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
the ü indicator lamp remains illuminated.
Please be sure to check the indicator every time
you use the special system child seat. Should the
light go out while the restraint is installed, please
check installation. If the light remains out, do not
use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or is
continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must
see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating
any child on the front passenger seat. See page 284 for
notes on the ü indicator lamp.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Seat belt fastened
Airbags are intended as a supplement to seat belts.
Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus
seat belts in impacts for which the airbags were
designed to operate, and do not afford any protection
whatsoever in crashes for which the airbags are not
designed to deploy.
• first threshold exceeded: ETR activates
• second threshold exceeded: airbag also activates
Seat belt not fastened
Front seats:
• first threshold exceeded: airbag activates, not ETR
Rear outer seats:
The SRS uses two crash severity levels (thresholds) to
activate either the emergency tensioning retractor (ETR)
or front airbag or both. Activation depends on the
direction and severity of the impact exceeding the
preset thresholds and whether the seat belt is fastened.
• first threshold exceeded: ETR activates
Driver and front passenger and rear outer seat systems
operate independently of each other.
Restraint systems
65
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
66
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR)
They remove slack from the belts in such a way that the
seat belts fit more snugly against the body restricting its
forward movement as much as possible.
The seat belts for the front and rear outer seats are
equipped with emergency tensioning retractors. These
tensioning retractors are located in each belt’s inertia
reel and become operationally ready with the electronic
key in starter switch position 1 or 2.
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-
overs, certain side impacts, or other accidents without
sufficient frontal or rear impact forces, the emergency
tensioning retractors will not be activated. The driver
and passengers will then be protected by the fastened
seat belts and inertia reel in the usual manner.
The emergency tensioning retractors are designed to
activate only when the seat belts are fastened during
frontal impacts exceeding the first threshold of the SRS
and in rear impacts exceeding a preset severity level.
Note:
The front passenger ETR activates only if the front
passenger seat is occupied.
Heavy objects on the front passenger seat can appear to
the “SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in
that seat which causes the passenger front airbag to
deploy and the ETR to activate in a crash exceeding the
appropriate threshold.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
1 Driver airbag
Front airbags
2 Front passenger airbag
The most effective occupant restraint system yet
developed for use in production vehicles is the seat belt.
In some cases, however, the protective effect of a seat
belt can be further enhanced by an airbag.
In conjunction with wearing the seat belts, the driver
and front passenger airbags can provide increased
protection for the driver and front passenger in certain
frontal impacts exceeding preset thresholds.
Side impact and head protection window curtain airbags
can provide increased protection to belted occupants on
the impacted side of the vehicle in side impacts
exceeding its preset threshold.
The operational readiness of the airbag system is
verified by the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument
cluster when turning the electronic key in starter switch
to position 1. When turning the electronic key in starter
switch to position 2 the indicator lamp “SRS” in the
instrument cluster comes on. If no fault is detected, the
lamp will go out when the engine is running. After the
lamp goes out, the system continues to monitor the
components and circuitry of the airbag system and will
indicate a malfunction by coming on again. If the lamp
P91.60-2294-27
Restraint systems
67
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Warning!
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
68
does not come on at all or if it fails to extinguish or if it
comes on thereafter, a malfunction in the system has
been detected.
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the
system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be
activated when needed in an accident, which could
result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also
result in injury.
The following system components are monitored or
undergo a self-check: crash-sensor(s), airbag ignition
circuits, front seat belt buckles, emergency tensioning
retractors, seat sensor.
Have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
In the operational mode, after the indicator lamp has
gone out following the initial check, interruptions or
short circuits in the airbag ignition circuit and in the
driver and front passenger seat belt buckle harnesses,
and low voltage in the entire system are detected and
indicated.
Note:
See page 281 for information on the supplemental
restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The driver and passenger front airbags are designed to
activate only in certain frontal impacts exceeding a
preset threshold.
Note:
The front passenger airbag deploys only if the front
passenger seat is occupied and the ü indicator lamp
in the center console is not illuminated.
Heavy objects on the front passenger seat can appear to
the “SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in
that seat which causes the passenger front airbag to
deploy in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold.
Restraint systems
69
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
70
Side impact airbags, window curtain airbags
The side impact airbag for the front passenger deploys
only if the front passenger seat is occupied.
Side impact airbags operate best in conjunction with a
properly positioned and fastened seat belt.
Note:
Heavy objects on front passenger seat can cause the
front passenger side impact airbag to deploy in a crash.
Window curtain airbag
The head protection window curtain airbags afford
greater protection against injuries to the head and
upper body. They fill up in the area between the A and
C pillars (see arrows) between the side windows and an
occupant’s head.
P91.60-2376-26
3 Side impact airbags
4 Window curtain airbags
The window curtain airbags are designed to activate
only in certain side impacts exceeding a preset
threshold. Only the head protection window curtain
airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys.
Side impact airbags
The side impact airbags are designed to activate only in
certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold. Only
the side impact airbags on the impacted side of the
vehicle deploy.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important!
Warning!
Airbags are designed to activate only in certain
frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact
and head protection window curtain airbags)
impacts which exceed preset thresholds.
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of
injury in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, or
side (side impact and head protection window
curtain airbags) impacts which may cause
significant injuries, however, no system available
today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient
severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will
they provide their supplemental protection.
The activation of the “SRS” temporarily releases a
small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust,
however, is neither injurious to your health, nor
does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might
cause some temporary breathing difficulty for
people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To
avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing
difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the
airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or door.
The driver and passenger should always wear their
seat belts, otherwise it is not possible for the airbags
to provide their supplemental protection.
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts,
roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or
other accidents, the airbags will not be activated.
The driver and passengers will then be protected by
the fastened seat belts.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
Restraint systems
71
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
72
Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags
which are designed to activate in certain impacts
exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential
and severity of injury. It is important to your safety
and that of your passenger that you replace deployed
airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to
ensure the vehicle will continue to provide crash
protection for occupants.
• Sit properly belted in an upright position with
your back against the backrest.
• Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper operation of
vehicle controls. The distance from the center
of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the
airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at
least ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of
adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If
you have any problems, please see your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags
inflate, it is very important for the driver and front
passenger to always be in a properly seated
position and to wear your seat belt.
• Do not lean with your head or chest close to the
steering wheel or dashboard.
For maximum protection in the event of a collision
always be in normal seated position with your back
against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and
ensure that it is properly positioned on your body.
• Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel
rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim
can increase the risk and potential severity of
hand/arm injury when driver front airbag
inflates.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed
and force, a proper seating and hands on steering
wheel position will help to keep you at a safe
distance from the airbag. Occupants who are
unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag
can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates
with great force in the blink of an eye:
• Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Occupants, especially children, should never
lean their heads in the area of the door where
the side airbag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the airbag be
triggered.
Warning!
Accident research shows that the safest place for
children in an automobile is in the rear seat.
Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or
under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle,
you must properly use a BabySmartTM child
restraint which will turn off the passenger side
front airbag. BabySmartTM will not, however, turn
off the vehicle’s side impact airbag.
• Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized Baby SmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with the
BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to
deactivate the passenger side front airbag
when it is properly installed. Otherwise they
will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in
a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
can result.
It should be noted that with respect to both front
and rear side impact airbags there is a possibility
for a side airbag related injury if occupants,
especially children, are not properly seated or
restrained when next to a side airbag which needs
to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its
job.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in
severe injuries to you or other occupants.
Restraint systems
73
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
74
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow
these guidelines: (1) occupants, especially
children, should never place their bodies or lean
their heads in the area of the door where the side
airbag inflates. This could result in serious
injuries or death should the side airbag be
activated; (2) always sit upright, properly use the
seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or
child restraint system for all children 12 years old
or under; and (3) always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of these
guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat
occupants to have both rear door mounted side
airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be
accomplished upon your written election to do so at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an
additional cost. Please contact your local
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-
MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency
tensioning retractor and airbag
• No modifications of any kind may be made to
any components or wiring of the “SRS”. This
includes changing or removing any component
or part of the “SRS”, the installation of
Warning!
additional trim material, badges etc. over the
steering wheel hub, front passenger airbag
cover, door trim panels, or door frame trims,
and installation of additional electrical/
electronic equipment on or near “SRS”
components and wiring. Keep area between
airbags and occupants free from objects (e.g.
packages, purses, umbrellas, etc).
• Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced and
their anchoring points must also be checked.
Use only belts installed or supplied by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
• Airbags and “ETR’s” are designed to function
on a one-time-only basis. An airbag or
emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) that was
activated must be replaced.
• Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
• Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
Restraint systems
75
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
76
• Do not hang items such as coat hangers from
the coat hooks or handles over the door. These
items may turn into projectiles and cause head
and other injuries when curtain airbag is
deployed.
• For your protection and the protection of
others, when scrapping the airbag unit or
emergency tensioning retractor, our safety
instructions must be followed. These
instructions are available from your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
• An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has
inflated. Do not touch.
• Given the considerable deployment speed and
the textile structure of the airbags, there is the
possibility of abrasions or other injuries
resulting from airbag deployment.
• Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can lead to
possible injury through an unintended
activation of the “SRS”.
When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give
notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with
an “SRS” by alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
• In addition, through improper work there is a
risk of rendering the “SRS” inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment. Work
on the “SRS” must therefore only be performed
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infant and child restraint systems
Important!
We recommend all infants and children be properly
restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. All
lap-shoulder belts except the driver seat belt have
special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child
restraints.
The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in
all 50 states and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system properly
secured by a lap-shoulder belt, and that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of
compliance with this standard can be found on the
instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction
manual provided with the restraint.
To activate, pull shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During the seat belt retraction a ratcheting
sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt
retractor is activated. The belt is now locked.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt
retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in
the usual manner.
When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure
to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Note:
For child seats with mounting fittings for tether
anchorages refer to page 79 (installation of infant and
child restraint systems).
Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside
of vehicle and to infant or child restraints.
Warning!
Never release the seat belt buckle while vehicle is
in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will
be deactivated.
Restraint systems
77
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
78
Warning!
Infants and small children should never share a
seat belt with another occupant. During an
accident, they could be crushed between the
occupant and seat belt.
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger
front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury can result.
Children too big for child restraint systems must
ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or
neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. to
the point where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly
without one.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Infants and small children must ride in back seats
and be seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system, which is properly secured with
the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it
from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to
prevent the child restraint from becoming a
projectile in the event of an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle;
even if the children are secured in a child restraint
system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint
system may use vehicle equipment and may cause
serious personal injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation of infant and child restraint systems
Prior to installing a tether strap, note the following
steps:
1. Roll up retractable luggage cover and partition net,
see page 210.
2. Fold backrest forward (page 213), guide tether strap
through head restraints. Be carefully that the tether
strap is not twisted. Fold backrest back until it locks
in place.
If the top tether is installed on left back side of rear
backrest, remove twin-reel roller blind, see
page 212.
The tether strap has to run through the locking
mechanism of twin-reel roller blind.
P91.40-2291-26
The anchorage rings (1) are located on back side of
outer rear backrests and on the floor behind rear center
seat.
Warning!
Always lock backrest in its upright position when
rear seat bench is occupied by passengers, or the
extended cargo area is not in use. Check for secure
locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest.
Restraint systems
79
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
80
To secure a tether strap to the anchorage, securely
fasten the hook (3), which is part of the tether strap, to
the anchorage ring (2). For safety, please make sure that
the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
3. Fold up anchorage rings (2).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child seat mounts - “LATCH” type
To install a “LATCH” type child seat, the mounts (1)
must be folded forward until they lock in place. To do so,
grip inner side of mounts and fold forward. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and
left side mounting fittings (1).
To fold mounts (1) back, press down button (2) on each
mount and return mount into its catch.
Non-“LATCH” type child seats may also be used and are
capable of being installed using the vehicle’s seat belt
system. Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
2
1
P91.12-2233-26
Note:
This vehicle is provided with two “LATCH” (Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) type mounts (at
each of the outer rear seats) for the installation of a
“LATCH” child seat having the matching mounting
fittings. The mounts can be folded back between the
seat cushion and the backrest.
With a child seat installed in the left rear seat, the seat
belt for the center seat occupied by a passenger must
operate freely. Guide seat belt between its seat cushion
mount and backrest mount along outside of right side
child seat mount.
Restraint systems
81
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Restraint systems
82
Warning!
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child
seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
The “LATCH” mounting fittings are intended for
children up to 50 lbs (22 kg) in weight.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
even if the children are secured in a child restraint
system.
Children too big for child restraint systems must
ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or
neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. to
the point where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly
without one.
Before installing the child seat, make sure the
mounting fittings (1) are folded out and locked in
place.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s
instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the right
and left side mounting fittings (1).
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose
during an accident which could result in serious
injury or death to your child.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering wheel adjustment (electrical)
Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could
cause the driver to lose the control of the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch and lock your
vehicle.
The steering wheel adjustment feature can also be
operated with the driver’s door open. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause serious personal injury.
The switch is located on the driver’s door.
1 Steering column, lengthen or shorten column
Move the switch to the front or rear.
2 Steering column, height
To adjust the steering wheel position, turn the electronic
key in starter switch to position 1 or 2. With the driver’s
door open, the steering wheel can also be operated with
the electronic key removed or in starter switch
position 0.
Move the switch up or down.
Note:
The steering wheel adjustment can be stored together
with the seat and exterior mirror adjustment.
See page 89 for notes on the memory function.
Steering wheel adjustment
83
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Rear view mirrors
Rear view mirrors
84
Note:
The automatic antiglare function does not react, if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the
mirror.
Inside rear view mirror
Manually adjust the inside rear view mirror.
Warning!
Inside rear view mirror, automatic antiglare
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass
breaks.
Antiglare mode:
With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the
mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in
light sensitivity.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the
liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin,
clothing, or respiratory system. In cases it does,
immediately flush affected area with water, and
seek medical help if necessary.
With the gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the
interior light switched on, the mirror brightness does
not respond to changes in light sensitivity.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior rear view mirrors
Exterior rear view mirror adjustment
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
Push button to select mirror to be adjusted:
Driver’s side – Push button (1).
Passenger side – Push button (2).
Push the adjustment button (3) up, down, left or right
according to the setting desired.
P
0
Auto
Notes:
The exterior rear view mirrors have electrically heated
glass. The heater switches on automatically, depending
on outside temperature.
If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly pivoted from its
normal position, it must be repositioned by applying
firm pressure until it snaps into place.
The buttons are located above the exterior lamp switch.
The memory button (4) is located on the driver’s door.
Warning!
Storing exterior rear view mirror positions
(only vehicles with memory function)
Exercise care when using the passenger side
exterior mirror. The mirror surface is convex
(outwardly curved surface for a wider field of
view). Objects in mirror are closer than they
appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
The exterior rear view mirror positions are stored in
memory with the seat/steering wheel adjustment and
can be recalled when necessary. See page 89 for notes
on the memory function.
Rear view mirrors
85
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Rear view mirrors
86
Parking position exterior rear view mirror
Note:
(only vehicles with memory function)
For activating the mirror adjustment, see under
individual setting menu “CONVENIENCE” – “MIRROR
SETTING WHEN PARKING”, on page 128.
The passenger side exterior mirror can be adjusted and
programmed to assist the driver during parking
maneuvers (e.g. to observe the curb or other objects
close to the vehicle).
The mirror position can now be adjusted as desired.
The passenger side mirror will return to its previous
position:
With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, and
the exterior rear view mirror switch in the passenger
side position, the passenger side mirror will be turned
downward when placing the gear selector lever in “R”
reverse.
• immediately at speeds above approx. 6 mph
(10 km/h) – i ndependentoftheengagedgear,
• after 10 seconds when shifting gear selector lever
from “R” Reverse,
• by pressing the driver’s side mirror button %.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store passenger mirror parking position:
1. The vehicle must be stationary.
Note:
One stored parking position is available for each of the
two electronic keys.
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
This is only possible if you select “ON” in the menu
“SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT”. Refer to individual
setting menu “CONVENIENCE” – “SETTINGS KEY-
DEPENDENT”, see page 128.
2. Select passenger side mirror & and adjust the
mirror to view the curb.
3. Push the memory button “M” (4).
4. Within 3 seconds push bottom of adjustment
button (3).
The mirror should not move.
Repeat the memory procedure if the mirror moves.
Rear view mirrors
87
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Warning!
Car care
Index
Rear view mirrors
88
Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror,
antiglare mode
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass
breaks.
With the electronic key in starter switch position 2, the
mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in
light sensitivity.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the
liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin,
clothing, or respiratory system. In cases it does,
immediately flush affected area with water, and
seek medical help if necessary.
With the gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the
interior light switched on, the mirror brightness does
not respond to changes in light sensitivity.
Note:
Important!
The automatic antiglare function does not react, if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the
inside rear view mirror.
Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle
paint finish can only be completely removed while in
their liquid state, by applying plenty of water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory function
Warning!
Do not activate the memory function while driving.
Activating the memory function while driving
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Together with the driver’s seat position you can store
the positions for steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors.
For the front passenger seat you can store the seat
position.
Three stored positions for the driver’s seat are available
for each of the two electronic keys.
This is only possible if you select “ON” in the menu
“SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT”. Refer to individual
setting menu “CONVENIENCE” – “SETTINGS KEY-
DEPENDENT”, see page 128.
The memory and stored position buttons are located on
the doors.
1 Memory button, used to store selected positions
which can be retrieved by pressing
2 Stored position button
Turn to position “1”, “2”, or “3”
Memory function
89
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Memory function
90
Storing positions into memory:
Recalling positions from memory:
With the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2
or with the relevant door open and the electronic key
inserted in the starter switch.
To recall a seat /steering wheel/exterior rear view
mirror position, turn button (2) to selected memory
position and press to recall.
Adjust the seat to the desired position.
The seat/ steering wheel/exterior rear view mirror
movement stops when the button is released.
Driver’s seat:
You can also adjust the steering wheel and the exterior
rear view mirrors electrically for the driver’s seat. See
page 85 for exterior rear view mirror adjustment and
page 83 for steering wheel adjustment.
Caution!
Do not operate the power seats using the memory
button if the backrest is in an excessively reclined
position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear
seats.
Turn button (2) to selected memory position.
Push memory button (1), release and push the position
button (2) within 3 seconds.
First move backrest to an upright position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important!
Warning!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check
and adjust if necessary the seat height, seat position
fore and aft, and backrest angle to insure adequate
control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should
also be adjusted for proper height. See also airbag
section for proper seat positioning.
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM system
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger
side front airbag when it is properly installed.
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal
injury can result.
In addition, also adjust the steering wheel to ensure
adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the
inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted
for adequate rearward vision.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Infants and small children must ride in back seats
and be seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system, which is properly secured with
the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be
seated in a properly secured restraint system that
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view
mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts
should be done before the vehicle is put into motion.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.
Memory function
91
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Knob for instrument cluster illumination,
see page 94
11 Indicator lamp without function. It illuminates with
the electronic key in starter switch position 2. It
should go out when the engine is running.
Reset knob for trip odometer, see page 95 and
individual settings, see page 115
12 Multifunction display, see page 96.
Malfunction and warning messages in the
multifunction display, see page 285
2 Tachometer
3 Antilock brake system (ABS) malfunction indicator
lamp, see page 283
13 Trip odometer, see page 95 and 100
4 Brake fluid low or parking brake engaged,
14 Main odometer, see page 100
see page 290
15 Display for program mode and gear range
5 Speedometer
indicators, see page 246
6 Left turn signal indicator lamp, see combination
16 Malfunction/warning message memory,
switch on page 142
see page 113
7 Electronic stability program (ESP) warning lamp,
17 Outside temperature indicator, see page 95
system is adjusting to road conditions, see page 284
18 Digital clock, see individual settings on page 115
8 Indicator lamp without function. It illuminates with
the electronic key in starter switch position 2. It
should go out when the engine is running.
19 Right turn signal indicator lamp, see combination
switch on page 142
20 Fasten seat belts, see page 284
9 CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp,
see page 278
21 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) malfunction
indicator lamp, see page 281
10 High beam headlamp indicator,
see exterior lamp switch, page 137, and
combination switch, see page 142
22 Fuel gauge with reserve and fuel cap placement
warning lamp, see page 282
Instrument cluster
93
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Instrument cluster
94
Activating instrument cluster display
The instrument cluster is activated by:
• Opening the door1.
Display illumination, changing basic settings for driving
at dusk or in darkness:
Rotate adjusting knob (1) clockwise – instrument lamp
intensity increases.
• Pressing button (1) on the instrument cluster1.
Rotate adjusting knob (1) counterclockwise –
instrument lamp intensity decreases.
• Turning the electronic key in starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
Note:
• Switching on the exterior lamps.
It is not possible to select a basic brightness setting in
daylight – the intensity is adjusted automatically.
Instrument cluster illumination
The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or
brightened automatically to suit daylight lighting
conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also be
adjusted when the vehicle’s exterior lamps are switched
on.
1
The instrument cluster is activated for approximately 30 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside temperature indicator (17)
Warning!
Trip odometer (13)
To reset to “0” miles/km:
Activate the instrument cluster if it is not already
activated, see page 94.
The outside temperature indicator is not designed
to serve as an Ice-Warning Device and is therefore
unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated
temperatures just above the freezing point do not
guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction
steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer
appears if it is not displayed. See page 100.
Press button (1) on the instrument cluster, see page 94.
The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper
area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by
road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature
can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer
placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
Tachometer (2)
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive
engine speed.
Avoid this engine speed, as it may result in serious
engine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Adaption to ambient temperature takes place in steps
and depends on the prevailing driving conditions (stop-
and-go or moderate, constant driving) and amount of
temperature change.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted
if the engine is operated within the red marking.
Note:
The unit for the temperature indicator display can be set
in the individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER” – “TEMP. INDICATOR” on page 115.
Instrument cluster
95
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
96
P54.30-4452-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, you may use
the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to call
up, control and set the following systems in the
multifunction display:
3 Navigation system, see page 110
4 Malfunction message memory, see page 113
5 Individual settings, see page 115
6 Tri pcomputer,see page 111
1 Trip odometer and main odometer, see page 95 and
page 100
After start
After reset
Fuel tank content
Flexible service system (FSS), see page 132
Vehicle speed, see page 100
Coolant temperature gauge, see page 131
Engine oil level indicator, see page 135
7 Telephone, see page 105
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
required system is displayed.
2 Audio systems, see page 102
Radio, see page 102
CD player, see page 103
Cassette player, see page 104
The display advances by one system each time the
button is pressed.
You may call up additional displays within some of these
categories by pressing the j or k button.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
97
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
98
Note:
Warning!
The displays in the multifunction display can be set to
German, English, French, Italian or Spanish language.
See the individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER” – “TEXT” on page 115 for instructions on
changing the language setting.
A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/
her primary focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting
features through the multifunction steering wheel
should only be done by the driver when traffic and
road conditions permit it to be done safely.
The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player,
cassette player) will appear in English, regardless of the
language selected.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press button:
3 è for next system
4 ÿ for previous system
5 j for next display in system
6 k for previous display in system
7 æ to increase the volume, see page 130
8 ç to decrease the volume, see page 130
9 í to dial a telephone number, see page 105
10 ì to end a call
See page 105 for telephone and page 109 for
instructions on answering an incoming call.
11 Horn pad
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
required system is displayed.
P46.10-2195-27
The display advances by one system each time the
button is pressed.
1 Multifunction display
2 Multifunction steering wheel
You may call up additional displays in some systems by
pressing the j or k button.
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
99
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
100
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Trip and main odometer and sub menu
P54.30-4453-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Trip odometer and main odometer
See page 95 for instructions on resetting the trip
odometer.
Press è or ÿ button repeatedly until the trip
odometer and main odometer display (1) appears.
Press the j or k button repeatedly until the
required display (2, 3, 4, 5, 1) appears.
2 Coolant temperature gauge, see page 131
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
3 Vehicle speed if “SPEED DISP.” is selected in the
individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER” – “SELECT DISPLAY”, refer to page 118
Outside temperature if “OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE”
is selected in the individual setting menu
“INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” – “SELECT DISPLAY”,
see page 118
4 FSS (Flexible service system), see page 132
5 Engine oil level indicator, see page 135
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
101
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
102
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Audio systems
Radio
1 Audio system is switched off.
2 The radio is switched on.
3 Wave band setting and memory location number,
where appropriate.
4 Station name setting or station frequency.
5 This only appears when “MEMORY” rather than
“STATION SEARCH” has been selected in the
individual setting menu “VEHICLE” – “PRESS
BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE”. See page 125.
The radio must be switched on.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until
display (2) appears.
Press button j or k repeatedly until the required
station or frequency is displayed.
Use the j of k button to select a stored station or
station frequency. This depends on the selection made
in the individual setting menu “VEHICLE” – “PRESS
BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE”. See individual settings,
page 125.
P54.30-3634-27
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD player
1 Radio system is switched off.
2 The CD player is switched on.
3 The number of the CD currently playing is displayed
if you are using a CD changer.
4 Track number.
“TITLE” appears on vehicles with COMAND system.
“TRACK” appears on vehicles with audio system.
The radio must be switched on.
The CD player must be switched on.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until
display (2) appears.
Press the j or k button repeatedly until the
required track number (4) is displayed.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Note:
P54.30-3635-27
To select a CD from the magazine, press a number on
the audio system or the (optional) COMAND system key
pad located in the center dashboard.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
103
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
104
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Cassette player
1 Audio system is switched off.
2 The cassette player is switched on.
3 Side being played.
The radio must be switched on.
The cassette player must be switched on.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until
display (2) appears.
Pressing the j button fast forward on to the next
track.
Pressing the k button rewinds the cassette to the
beginning of the current track.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Notes:
To select the reverse side of the tape, press button below
track number on the audio system display, or enter
request on the (optional) COMAND system located in
the center dashboard.
P54.30-3639-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Telephone
1 The telephone is switched off.
Telephone book
2 The vehicle is currently outside the transmitter or
receiver range.
3 The telephone is ready for use.
4 Name selected from the telephone book.
5 Number for the name selected. The dialing
commences.
6 Dialing is completed. The name is displayed. The
display remains for the duration of the call.
7 Duration of call
8 Memory location number
9 Signal strength (in top right corner):
Vehicles with audio system:
the higher the number, the stronger the signal
received from the net.
Vehicles with COMAND (in top left corner):
the higher the number of bars, the stronger the
signal received from the net.
P54.30-3640-27
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
105
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
106
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
The telephone must be switched on.
Press the í button when the name you require
appears in the display (4). The telephone number (5) is
dialed.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
display (3) appears. See the separate telephone
instructions manual.
The name will be displayed when dialing is completed.
Display (6) remains for the duration of the call.
Pressing j or k “browses” alphabetically forward
or backward through the telephone book, providing it
was previously downloaded. See telephone operator’s
manual for details concerning downloading. Pressing
button j or k for longer than a second “browses”
rapidly through the telephone book. The name selected
appears in the display.
Pressing the ì button hangs up and display (3)
appears.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Note:
Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call.
The procedure is cancelled and display (4) appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Redialing
1 The telephone is ready for use.
2 Number or name stored in the redial memory.
3 Number in the redial memory — redialing has
commenced.
4 Dialing is completed and the name stored in the
telephone book is displayed or the number dialed
will remain displayed if no name has been store. The
display remains for the duration of the call.
5 Signal strength:
Vehicles with audio system (in top right corner):
the higher the number, the stronger the signal
received from the net.
Vehicles with COMAND (in top left corner):
the higher the number of bars, the stronger the
signal received from the net.
6 Memory location numbers — the 10 most recently
dialed numbers are stored.
L0, most recently dialed number,
L1 to L9, previously dialed numbers.
P54.30-3641-27
7 Duration of call.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
107
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
108
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
The telephone must be switched on.
Press the í button when the required number or
name appears in the display (2).
The telephone number (3) is dialed.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
display (1) appears.
Once dialing is complete the name (4) is displayed if the
name is stored in the telephone book; failing that the
number dialed will remain displayed. The display
remains for the duration of the call.
Pressing the í button activates the redial memory
and the most recently dialed number is displayed.
Pressing the j or k button “browses” forward or
backward through the redial memory. The number
selected appears in the display.
Pressing the ì button hangs up and display (1)
appears.
Note:
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Press the ì button if you do not wish to make a call.
The procedure is cancelled and display (1) appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Incoming call
Press the í button to answer the call.
Press the ì button to hang up or if you do not wish
to answer the incoming call.
The telephone must be switched on.
1 “CALL” — you are being called.
2 Signal strength:
Vehicles with audio system (in top right corner):
the higher the number, the stronger the phone
signal received by the antenna.
Vehicles with COMAND (in top left corner):
the higher the number of bars, the stronger the
phone signal received by the antenna.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
109
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
110
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Navigation system
1 The navigation system is switched off.
2 The navigation system is switched on but no
destination has been specified.
3 The navigation system is switched on and
destination guidance is active.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
required system is displayed.
See the separate COMAND (Cockpit Management and
Data System) operator’s manual for notes on the
navigation system.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
P54.30-3643-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip computer
1 “AFTER START” — short distance memory
2 “AFTER RESET” — long distance memory
3 Estimated range remaining
4 Distance covered “AFTER START” or
“AFTER RESET”
5 Elapsed time “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET”
6 Average speed “AFTER START” or “AFTER RESET”
7 Average fuel consumption “AFTER START” or
“AFTER RESET”
Press the button è or ÿ repeatedly until the
display (1, 2 or 3) appears.
Press the j or k button until the “AFTER START”
short distance memory (1), the “AFTER RESET” long
distance memory (2) or estimated range remaining
indicator (3) appears.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
P54.30-4643-27
Note:
The display (1) always appears the next time the trip
computer is called up.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
111
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
112
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
To reset the short “AFTER START” (1) or long
“AFTER RESET” distance memory (2):
Note:
The “AFTER START” trip odometer reading is
automatically reset after four hours of electronic key not
being in starter switch position 1 or 2.
Call up the relevant display (1 or 2) using the j or
k button and press the reset knob on the instrument
cluster, see page 92, until the values are reset to “0”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Malfunction/warning message memory
1 There are no messages stored in the system.
2 Number of messages stored in the system.
3 There are messages stored in the system.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
message memory (1 or 2) is displayed.
Press the j or k button if display (2) appears.
The stored messages will now be displayed in order.
See page 285 for malfunction and warning messages.
Display (2) will reappear after you have scanned all the
malfunction and warning messages.
Should any malfunction or warning messages be stored
while driving, they will reappear in the display (2) when
the electronic key is in starter switch position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
The malfunction or warning messages will now be
displayed for approximately 5 seconds each.
Pressing the reset knob on the instrument cluster
(see page 92) displays the malfunction and warning
messages once more.
P54.30-4644-27
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
113
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
114
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
The message memory will be cleared when the
electronic key is turned in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2. Should any subsequent faults occur,
they will be displayed in the message memory.
Important!
Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated
for certain systems and displayed to a low level of detail.
The malfunction and warning messages are simply a
reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the driver’s responsibility to
maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks performed on
the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages. See page 285, for malfunction and
warning messages.
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Individual settings
1 Preliminary display of the individual settings.
2 “SETTINGS” – the requested menu can be called up
in this options menu:
“INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”, see page 118.
“LIGHTING”, see page 122.
“VEHICLE”, see page 125.
“CONVENIENCE”, see page 128.
The four menus contain additional submenus.
Individual settings can be selected in these
submenus.
3 See below for instructions on returning the setting
menus to the factory settings.
4 Acknowledgment.
Note:
The displayed menu “SETTINGS” depends on the
equipment of the vehicle.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
115
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
116
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
Note:
individual setting preliminary display (1) appears.
These settings may only be performed with the
electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2.
Press the j or k button until the setting menu
“SETTINGS” (2) is displayed.
Pressing the æ or ç button controls the selection
marker in the setting menu.
“INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”, see page 118.
“LIGHTING”, see page 122.
“VEHICLE”, see page 125.
“CONVENIENCE”, see page 128
Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the next or
previous system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return menu “SETTINGS” (2) to its factory
setting:
Note:
For safety reasons, the individual setting “LIGHT
CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE” in menu “LIGHTING”
cannot be reset while driving, see page 124. If an
attempt is made, the message “LIGHTING” – “CANNOT
BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS
WHILE DRIVING” will be displayed.
• Call up the individual setting preliminary
display (1) or display (2).
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster
(see page 92) for approximately 3 seconds.
Display (3) will appear.
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once
more. The menu “SETTINGS” is reset to factory
settings, acknowledged by display (4).
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear if you do not press the reset knob on the
instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The
setting menus will not be reset.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
117
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
118
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
“INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”
P54.30-4455-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Preliminary display of the individual settings
9 “SELECT DISPLAY” – The selection “SPEED DISP.”
respectively “OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE” is
2 “SETTINGS” – the individual setting menu
“INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” can be called up in this
options menu.
permanently displayed in the multifunction display.
“SPEED DISP.” can be used to display, for instance,
the present speed in km/h if the setting menu (7)
“DISPLAY VALUES IN” is set to indicate km.
Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction
steering wheel controls the selection marker.
10 See page 121 for instructions on returning the
individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER”
to the factory setting.
3 “SET TIME HOURS:”
4 “SET TIME MINUTES:”1
5 “12/24 O’CLOCK” – the unit set is displayed in the
11 Acknowledgment.
instrument cluster display
Note:
6 “TEMP. INDICATOR” – the unit set is displayed in
the outside temperature display, in the instrument
cluster and in the automatic air conditioner display.
Vehicles with COMAND:
For setting clock and speedometer units, see separate
COMAND operator’s manual.
7 “DISPLAY VALUES IN” – the unit set is displayed in
the multifunction display (except speedometer).
8 “TEXT” – sets the language used in the
multifunction display
1
Only vehicles without COMAND.
Vehicles with COMAND, see separate operator’s manual.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
119
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
120
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
individual setting preliminary display (1) appears.
Press the j or k button until the required
display (3 to 9) is displayed.
Press the j or k button until the setting menu
“SETTINGS” (2) is displayed.
Pressing the æ or ç button sets the time in
setting menus (3, 4) and controls the selection marker
in the setting menus (5 to 9).
Press button æ or ç until the individual setting
menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” is selected by the
selection marker.
The settings made are stored and applied immediately.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear again after you have run through all the setting
menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the
next or previous system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return menu “INSTRUMENT CLUSTER” (5 to 9) to
its factory setting:
• Call up one of the setting menus(3 to 9).
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster, see
page 92, for approximately 3 seconds. Display (10)
will appear.
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once
more. The individual setting menu “INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER” is reset to factory settings, acknowledged
by display (11).
The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will
appear if you do not press the reset knob on the
instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The
setting menus will not be reset.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
121
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
122
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
“LIGHTING”
P54.30-4456-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Preliminary display of the individual settings
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
individual setting preliminary display (1) appears.
2 “SETTINGS” – in this options menu you can call up
the individual setting menu “LIGHTING”.
Press the j or k button until the setting menu
“SETTINGS” (2) is displayed.
Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction
steering wheel controls the selection marker.
Press button æ or ç until the individual setting
menu “LIGHTING” is selected by the selection marker.
3 “LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE”1, 2
,
see page 138.
Press the j or k button until the required
display (3 to 6) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç
button controls the selection marker. The settings made
are stored and applied immediately.
4 “LOCATOR LIGHTING”, see page 141.
5 “HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF”, see “Night
security illumination” on page 140.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear again after you have run through all the setting
menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the
next or previous system.
6 “INT. ILLUMINATION DELAYED SWITCH-OFF”, see
“Interior lighting” on page 191.
7 Returning the individual setting menu “LIGHTING”
to the factory setting.
8 Acknowledgment.
1
2
Except Canada
For safety reasons, setting only possible while vehicle is standing
still.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
123
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
124
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
To return menu “LIGHTING” (3 to 6) to its factory
setting:
Note:
For safety reasons, the individual setting “LIGHT
CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE” in menu “LIGHTING”
cannot be reset while driving. If an attempt is made, the
message “LIGHTING” – “CANNOT BE COMPLETELY
RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING” will
be displayed.
• Call up menu (3 to 6).
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see
page 92) in the instrument cluster for approximately
3 seconds. Display (7) will appear.
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once
more. The individual setting menu “LIGHTING” is
reset to factory settings, acknowledged by
display (8).
The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will
appear if you do not press the reset knob on the
instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The
setting menus will not be reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“VEHICLE” (audio and central locking system)
P54.30-4457-29
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
125
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
Technical
data
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
cluster display
Index
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
126
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
1 Preliminary display of the individual settings
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
individual setting preliminary display (1) appears.
2 “SETTINGS” – in this options menu you can call up
the individual setting menu “VEHICLE”.
Press the j or k button until the setting menu
“SETTINGS” (2) is displayed.
Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction
steering wheel controls the selection marker.
Press button æ or ç until the individual setting
menu “VEHICLE” is selected by the selection marker.
3 “PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE”
– radio adjustment “STATION SEARCH”: use
the j or k button to select a frequency.
– radio adjustment “MEMORY”: use the j
or k button to select a stored station (preset
memory).
Press the j or k button until the required
display (3 to 4) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç
button controls the selection marker. The settings made
are stored and applied immediately.
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear again after you have run through all the setting
menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the
next or previous system.
4 “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK”, see automatic central
locking on page 39.
5 Returning the individual setting menu “VEHICLE”
to the factory setting.
6 Acknowledgment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return menu “VEHICLE” (3 and 4) to its factory
setting:
• Call up menu (3 or 4).
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see
page 92) in the instrument cluster for approximately
3 seconds. Display (5) will appear.
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once
more. The individual setting menu “VEHICLE” is
reset to factory settings, acknowledged by
display (6).
The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will
appear if you do not press the knob for instrument
cluster illumination within about 5 seconds. The
setting menus will not be reset.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
127
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
128
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
“CONVENIENCE” (vehicles with memory function)
P54.30-4458-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Preliminary display of the individual settings
Press button æ or ç until the individual setting
menu “CONVENIENCE” is selected by the selection
marker.
2 “SETTINGS” – in this options menu you can call up
the individual setting menu “CONVENIENCE”.
Pressing button æ or ç on the multifunction
steering wheel controls the selection marker.
Press the j or k button until the required
display (3 to 5) is displayed. Pressing the æ or ç
button controls the selection marker. The settings made
are stored and applied immediately.
3 “EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE”, see page 45.
4 “SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT”
The individual setting preliminary display (1) will
appear again after you have run through all the setting
menus. Pressing the è or ÿ button displays the
next or previous system.
if setting “ON” is selected, all settings selected in
the individual setting can be stored key-dependent
in memory. Memory function, see page 89.
5 “MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING” – the
passenger side exterior mirror can be adjusted and
programmed to assist the driver during parking
maneuvers, see page 86.
6 Returning the individual setting menu
“CONVENIENCE” to the factory setting.
7 Acknowledgment.
Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the
individual setting preliminary display (1) appears.
Press the j or k button until the setting menu
“SETTINGS” (2) is displayed.
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
129
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
130
Car care
Index
Multifunction steering wheel, multifunction display
To return menu “CONVENIENCE” (3 to 5) to its
factory setting:
Setting the audio volume
You can only adjust the volume of the system currently
in use.
• Call up menu (3 to 5).
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster, see
page 92, in the instrument cluster for approximately
3 seconds. Display (6) will appear.
Vehicles with COMAND system:
The volume setting for each system (audio, telephone,
navigation and voice recognition system) is stored
separately.
• Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster once
more. The individual setting menu
Setting button:
“CONVENIENCE” is reset to factory settings,
acknowledged by display (7).
The individual setting display “SETTINGS” (2) will
appear if you do not press the reset knob on the
instrument cluster within about 5 seconds. The
setting menus will not be reset.
æ increases the volume.
ç reduces the volume.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coolant temperature gauge
During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 120°C.
The engine should not be operated with the coolant
temperature above 120°C. Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
• Driving when your engine is badly overheated
can cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire. You
could be seriously burned.
• Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do
not stand near the vehicle until it cools down.
Call up the trip odometer and main odometer by
pressing button è or ÿ on the multifunction
steering wheel. See page 100.
Note:
Press button j or k until the coolant
temperature gauge appears.
Excessive coolant temperatures trigger a warning in the
multifunction display. See page 294.
Coolant temperature gauge
131
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
132
Car care
Index
Flexible service system
Flexible service system (FSS)
The message is displayed for approximately 10 seconds
when turning the electronic key in starter switch to
position 2, or while driving when reaching the service
warning threshold.
(service indicator)
The symbols and messages indicate the type of service
to be performed:
9 Service A
½ Service B
One of the following messages will appear in the display
(e.g. Service A):
“SERVICE A – IN xx DAYS”
“SERVICE A – IN xx MILES” (Canada: KM)
“SERVICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx DAYS”
“SERVICE A – EXCEEDED BY xx MILES” (Canada: KM)
“SERVICE A – DUE NOW”
The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is
directly related to the operating conditions of the
vehicle.
The next service due date is displayed either in days or
in miles, depending on your driving style.
The symbol 9 or ½ appears together with a
message in the multifunction indicator prior to the next
suggested service.
Once the suggested service term has passed, the symbol
and message appear for approximately 30 seconds and
a signal sounds every time when turning the electronic
key in starter switch to position 2.
Depending on operating conditions throughout the year,
the next service is calculated and displayed in days or
distance remaining.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The service indicator disappears automatically after
30 seconds or if the knob for instrument cluster
illumination, see page 92, in the instrument cluster is
pressed.
Note:
When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or more
days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any such
days not counted by the FSS can be added by your
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Calling up service indicator manually:
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
The interval between services is determined by the type
of driving for which the vehicle is used. For example,
driving at extreme speeds, and cold starts combined
with short distance driving in which the engine does not
reach operating normal temperature, reduce the interval
between services.
Call up the trip odometer and main odometer by
pressing button è or ÿ on the multifunction
steering wheel until the display appears. See page 100.
Press button j or k until the FSS indicator
appears.
The next or previous system is displayed by pressing
button è or ÿ.
Important!
The FSS indicator is not an engine oil level indicator.
See page 135 for engine oil level indicator.
Flexible service system
133
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
134
Car care
Index
Flexible service system
Following a completed A or B service the Mercedes-Benz
Center sets the counter mileage to 10 000 miles
(Canada: 15 000 km).
The multifunction display will show the question:
“DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTERVAL? –
CONFIRM BY PRESSING R”
The counter can also be set by any individual. To do so:
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2.
Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster again for
approximately 4 seconds to reset the service indicator
until a signal sounds.
To call up the trip odometer and main odometer, press
button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel until the display appears. See page 100.
The new service indicator is displayed with the reset
distance of 10 000 miles (Canada 15 000 km).
If the FSS counter was inadvertently reset, have a
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Press button j or k until the FSS indicator
appears.
However you choose to set your reference numbers, the
scheduled services as posted in the Service Booklet
must be followed to properly care for your vehicle.
Press the reset knob on the instrument cluster, see
page 92, for approximately 4 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine oil level indicator
• with engine not at operational temperature up to
approximately 30 minutes.
The engine oil level check can be repeated after a short
time.
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2.
To call up the trip odometer and main odometer, press
button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel until the display appears. See page 100.
With the multifunction display showing the trip
odometer and main odometer, press button j or
k on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the “MEASUREMENT CORRECT ONLY IF VEH.
LEVEL” engine oil level indicator appears. This indicator
is only a reminder. Measurement can be cancelled by
pressing button j or k if the vehicle is not
parked on level ground. An incorrect reading will be
recorded if you do not cancel the measurement. Move
the vehicle to level ground and measure again.
P54.30-4461-26
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level
ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.
Check oil level approximately 5 minutes after turning
off the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the oil
pan.
The electronic key in starter switch is not in position 2 if
the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – SWITCH ON IGNITION!”
message appears.
The message “OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD” will be
displayed if the required waiting period has not been
observed after turning off the engine:
The “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – MEASURING NOW!”
message is displayed after approximately 3 seconds.
• with engine at operational temperature
approximately 5 minutes.
Engine oil level indicator
135
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
136
Car care
Index
Engine oil level indicator
One of the following messages will subsequently appear
on the indicator:
The “MEASURING NOT POSSIBLE” message will be
displayed if a proper oil level check cannot be
performed. The engine oil level check can be repeated
after a short while.
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – O.K.”
No oil needs to be added.
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.0 QUART”
(Canada: 1.0 L)
Notes:
See malfunction and warning messages on page 285
and page 295 if an engine oil level indicator appears on
the multifunction display when the engine is running.
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 1.5 QUART”
(Canada: 1.5 L)
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – ADD 2.0 QUART”
(Canada: 2.0 L)
The engine oil level cannot be checked while the engine
is running. The “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – NOT WHEN
ENGINE ON” message will appear.
See “Adding engine oil level”, on page 314 for
instructions on adding engine oil.
Engine oil consumption
“ENGINE OIL LEVEL – REDUCE OIL LEVEL”
Do not overfill the engine.
Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could
cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Engine oil consumption checks should only be made
after the break-in period. During the break-in period,
higher oil consumption may be noticed and is normal.
Frequent driving at high engine speeds results in
increased consumption.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior lamp switch
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)
‡ Front fog lamps (pull out one stop) with parking
lamps and/or low beam headlamps on. Green
indicator in lamp switch comes on.
† Rear fog lamp (pull out to second detent) in
addition to the front fog lamps. Yellow indicator in
lamp switch comes on.
Note:
With the electronic key removed and the driver’s door
open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps
(except standing lamps) are not switched off.
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or
the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be
used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult
your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations
regarding allowable lamp operation.
M Off
U Automatic headlamp mode, see below.
C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, taillamps,
licence plate lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only: When the engine is running, the low
beam is additionally switched on.
Fog lamps are automatically switched off when the
exterior lamp switch is turned to position M or U.
B Parking lamps plus low beam or high beam
headlamps (combination switch pushed forward).
Exterior lamp switch
137
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
138
Car care
Index
Exterior lamp switch
Headlamp mode
Manual headlamp mode
Automatic headlamp mode
Turn exterior lamp switch to position U.
• Electronic key in starter switch position 1:
The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be
switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch. For
exterior lamp switch, see above.
The parking lamps switch on and off automatically
depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
• Electronic key in starter switch position 2 and the
Note:
engine running:
With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the
engine running, the low beam headlamps cannot be
switched off manually.
The low beam headlamps and parking lamps are
switched on and off automatically depending on the
brightness of the ambient light.
Warning!
The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can
still be switched on and off manually using the
exterior lamp switch.
The driver is responsible for the operation of the
vehicle’s lights at all times. The automatic
headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver.
Switch on the vehicle lights by hand when driving
or traffic conditions require you to do so.
Note:
With the daytime running lamp mode activated, the low
beam headlamps cannot be switched off manually.
The headlamps will not be automatically switched on
under foggy conditions.
Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp cannot be switched
on manually with exterior lamp switch in position U.
To activate the fog lamps turn exterior switch to
position B.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daytime running lamp mode
• USA only:
The high beam headlamps can also be activated
when driving with the daytime running lamp mode
activated and exterior lamp switch in position M.
Turn exterior lamp switch to position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps
are automatically switched on. In low ambient light
conditions the parking lamps will also switch on.
To activate the daytime running lamp mode, see the
individual setting menu “LIGHTING” – “LIGHT
CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE” on page 122.
• Canada only:
When shifting from a driving position to
position “N” or “P”, the low beam switches off
(3 minutes delay).
Note:
See page 137 for notes on the exterior lamp switch.
For nighttime driving the exterior lamp switch
should be turned to position B to permit
activation of the high beam headlamps.
Exterior lamp switch
139
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
140
Car care
Index
Exterior lamp switch
Night security illumination
Notes:
Within 10 minutes after closing the last door the night
security illumination can be reactivated by opening a
door.
At low ambient light conditions and with the engine
having been switched off, the exterior lamps (fogs lamps
and parking lamps) switch on for added illumination,
(except in daytime running mode). After the last door
has been closed the lamp-on time period commences.
If after switching the engine off, no doors are opened or
if after opening the doors they are not closed, the night
security illumination will switch off automatically after
60 seconds.
See the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” –
“HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH–OFF” on page 122 for
instructions on how to activate the function.
Deactivating night security illumination temporarily:
The lamp-on time period for night security illumination
can be set at several different timed levels from 0 (off) to
60 seconds, see the individual setting menu
“LIGHTING” – “HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH–OFF”
on page 122.
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 0
then to position 2 and back to position 0 again before
getting out of the vehicle. The night security
illumination will not be activated when the door is
opened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locator lighting
Headlamp cleaning system
After unlocking the vehicle with the electronic key
during darkness the fog lamps and parking lamps
switch on for approximately 40 seconds.
The exterior lamps will be switched off when opening
the driver’s door.
See the individual setting menu “LIGHTING” –
“LOCATOR LIGHTING” on page 122 for instructions on
how to activate the function.
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2.
The headlamps will be cleaned with a high-pressure
water jet when you press the headlamp washer
button (1).
See page 316 for instructions on filling up the
windshield/headlamp washer reservoir.
Exterior lamp switch
141
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
142
Car care
Index
Combination switch
Combination switch
To signal minor directional changes, such as changing
lanes on a highway, move combination switch briefly to
the point of resistance only and release. The turn
signals blink three times.
To operate the turn signals continuously, move the
combination switch past the point of resistance (up or
down). The switch is automatically canceled when the
steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree.
Turn signal failure
If one of the turn signals fails, the turn signal indicator
system flashes and sounds at a faster than normal rate.
1 Low beam
(exterior lamp switch position B)
2 High beam
(exterior lamp switch position B)
3 High beam flasher (high beam available
independent of exterior lamp switch position)
4 Turn signals, right
5 Turn signals, left
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
Intermittent wiping
Vehicles with optional rain sensor:
One initial wipe, pauses between wipes are
automatically controlled by a rain sensor
monitoring the wetness of the windshield. This
will not occur with a front door open.
Notes:
With switch in this position, one wipe occurs
when turning the electronic key in starter switch
from position 0. However, this might cause
scratches on a dry windshield. Turn combination
switch to Off position before turning the
electronic key in starter switch from position 0.
6 Press switch briefly:
Single wipe without washer fluid
(select only if windshield is wet).
Do not leave in intermittent setting when vehicle
is taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in
presence of water spray at windshield, and
wipers may be damaged as a result.
Push switch past resistance point:
Windshield washer system, windshield wipers.
See page 316 for instructions on filling the
windshield washer reservoir.
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
7 Windshield wipers
Vehicles without optional rain sensor:
If the vehicle is standing still, the wiper will
switch back one setting.
0
Off
Combination switch
Instruments
143
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
and controls
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
144
Car care
Index
Combination switch
Blocked windshield wipers
Emergency operation of windshield wipers
If the windshield wipers become blocked (for example,
due to snow), switch off the wipers.
In case of windshield wiper malfunction in switch
positions I or III, turn combination switch to wiper
setting II. Have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
For safety reasons before removing ice or snow, remove
electronic key from starter switch. Remove blockage.
Activate combination switch again (electronic key in
starter switch position 1).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield wipers smear
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio
If the windshield wipers smear the windshield, even
during rain, activate the washer system as often as
necessary. The fluid in the washer reservoir should be
mixed in the correct ratio.
For temperatures above freezing:
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water.
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water).
See page 316 for instructions on filling up the
windshield washer reservoir.
For temperature below freezing:
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze
See page 351 for instructions on replacing wiper blade
inserts.
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent).
Combination switch
145
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
146
Car care
Index
Rear window wiper/washer
Rear window wiper/washer
The rear window wiper will also automatically engage if
the windshield wiper is engaged and the gear selector
lever is placed in “R” Reverse.
P54.25-2533-26
The switch is located at the center console.
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2.
1 Press for interval wiping, indicator lamp comes on.
Press again to switch off, indicator lamp goes out.
2 Indicator lamp
3 Press and hold for simultaneous operation of wiper
and washer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard warning flasher switch
To activate hazard warning flasher, press switch once.
To deactivate, press switch again.
Note:
With the hazard warning flasher activated, the
combination switch in position for either left or right
turn, and the electronic key in starter switch position 1
or 2, only the respective left or right side turn signals
will operate. After turn signal cancellation, the hazard
warning flasher is activated.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated either
manually via the switch located in the dashboard, or it
is activated automatically at the time an airbag is
deployed.
Hazard warning flasher
147
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
148
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control
P83.20-2144-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Display and controls
6 Air volume control for right center air outlet
2 Air volume control for left center air outlet
3 Center air outlet, left, adjustable
7 Air volume control and air outlet on dashboard top
center
8 Air volume control for side air outlet
9 Side air outlet, adjustable
4 Thumbwheel for adding outside air at air outlets for
center, left and right sides, as well as dashboard top
center and rear passenger compartment
10 Side defroster outlet, fixed
5 Center air outlet, right, adjustable
Automatic climate control
149
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
150
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Display and controls
7 Temperature control, right, raising
8 Temperature control, right, lowering
9 Rear window defroster, see page 158
10 Economy mode, see page 157
Residual engine heat utilization, see page 157
11 Air volume control +
switch on system
12 Air volume control -
switch off system
13 Air recirculation, see page 155
14 Defrosting, see page 154
P83.40-2265-26
Important!
1 Temperature control, left, lowering
This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioning
system that uses R-134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a
refrigerant. Repairs should always be performed by a
qualified technician, and refrigerant should be collected
in a recovery system for recycling.
2 Temperature control, left, raising
3 Air distribution control switch left (automatic,
manual operation)
4 Activated charcoal filter, see page 156
5 Display
6 Air distribution control switch right (automatic,
manual operation)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic climate control
The system is always at operational readiness, except
when manually switched off.
The automatic climate control only operates with the
engine running.
The temperature selector should be left at the desired
temperature setting. The temperature selected is
reached as quickly as possible.
1 Temperature, left
2 Temperature, right
3 Air volume
The system will not heat or cool any quicker by setting a
higher or lower temperature.
The desired interior temperature and air distribution
can be selected separately for the left and right side of
the passenger compartment. Make the temperature
settings in small increments.
4 Automatic mode is selected
The automatic climate control removes considerable
moisture from the air during operation in the cooling
mode. It is normal for water to drip on the ground
through ducts in the underbody.
The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the
economy mode S is selected, see page 157.
Automatic climate control
151
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
152
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Notes:
Basic setting – automatic mode
Do not obstruct the air flow by placing objects on the air
flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window.
In the automatic mode the automatic climate control
cools or heats the interior depending on the direction
and strength of the sunlight, outside temperature and
the selected interior temperature of the vehicle. With
the automatic mode switched off, the air volume and
distribution can still be set manually.
Also keep the air intake grill in front of the windshield
free of snow and debris.
The storage compartment between the front seats can be
ventilated. See page 159 for notes on ventilating the
storage space under the armrest in the center console.
Briefly press left or right U button. The h, j
and k symbols will no longer be visible.
The air conditioner switches itself off for its own
protection if refrigerant is lost. No cooling will then take
place. Economy mode S cannot be switched off. Have
the air conditioner checked by a Mercedes-Benz Center
should this happen.
The economy mode and air recirculation functions will
be switched off. The automatic blower will be activated
at the same time.
We recommend to set the temperature switches on the
left and right to 72°F (22°C). This provides for
comfortable conditions in the vehicle.
If the vehicle interior has been heated by direct sunlight
and is very hot, ventilate the interior (open door or
windows for a short period) before driving off.
Heating mode:
To lower headroom temperature, use thumbwheel
(4, page 148).
Dust filter
Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out
before outside air enters the passenger compartment
through the air distribution system.
Air conditioning mode:
Open air outlets at dashboard top center (7, page 148)
for an even air distribution.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special settings (use only for short duration)
Air volume, manual
Seven blower speeds are available.
Air distribution, manual
Press right Q or left M side of air volume control
switch until the requested blower speed is attained.
Press left or right U button. The button pops out, the
h, j and k symbols are visible. Turn the
button to select the air distribution desired.
The display “AUTO” disappears and the automatic mode
is switched off. The selected blower speed is shown in
the display.
h Air from the center, side, dashboard top center
and rear passenger compartment air outlets.
j Air from the windshield, side defroster and rear
To return to automatic mode:
passenger compartment air outlets.
Press left or right U button until it clicks in. The
k Air from the center, side, footwell, rear footwell
h, j and k symbols will no longer be visible.
and rear passenger compartment air outlets.
To return to automatic mode:
Press left or right U button. The h, j
and k symbols will no longer be visible.
Automatic climate control
153
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
154
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Defrosting
Windows fogged up on the inside
Press the P button. The indicator lamp in the button
illuminates.
Switch off the economy mode, if selected:
Press button S. The indicator lamp in the button will
go out.
Maximum heated and automatically controlled amount
of air is directed to the defroster and windshield air
outlets.
Switch off air recirculation, if selected:
Press button O. The indicator lamp in the button will
go out.
Switch off air recirculation, if selected: Press
button O. The indicator lamp in the button will go
out.
Set blower to the maximum blower speed.
Increase temperature setting.
Pressing the P button again returns the system to
the previous setting.
Open the side air outlets and direct them onto the side
windows.
Windshield fogged up on the outside
Switch on the windshield wiper.
Close air outlet at dashboard top center (7, page 148).
Switch to manual mode.
Turn air distribution control switch to position h
or k.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Air recirculation
Switching off air recirculation and activating
convenience opening:
Select air recirculation:
The indicator lamp in the button O is illuminated.
The indicator lamp in the button O is not
Press button O for more than 2 seconds, the side
windows and the sliding/pop-up roof return to the
position they were in before closing.
illuminated.
Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the
button illuminates.
A window or the sliding/pop-up roof opened manually
after convenience closing will no longer be returned to
the position it was in before closing when convenience
opening is selected.
To switch off the air recirculation:
The indicator lamp in the button O is illuminated.
Press button O briefly. The indicator lamp in the
button goes out.
The system automatically switches from air
recirculation to fresh air:
Switching on air recirculation and activating
convenience closing of power windows and sliding/
pop-up roof:
• after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above
about 40°F (5°C),
The indicator lamp in the button O is not
illuminated.
• after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below
about 40°F (5°C),
Press button O for more than 2 seconds, the side
windows and the sliding/pop-up roof will be closed. The
indicator lamp in the button illuminates.
• after 5 minutes if economy mode S is selected.
The system switches automatically to air recirculation at
high outside temperatures. A quantity of outside air is
added after a maximum of 30 minutes.
If the windows should fog up from the inside, switch
from recirculated air back to fresh air.
Automatic climate control
155
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
156
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Activated charcoal filter
The activated charcoal filter should be switched off
when windows fog up on the inside, or if the passenger
compartment needs to be quickly heated or cooled
down.
An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors
and removes pollutants from air entering the passenger
compartment.
Switching on the activated charcoal filter and activating
convenience closing of power windows and sliding/
pop-up roof:
Select activated charcoal filter:
The indicator lamp in the button e is not
illuminated.
The indicator lamp in the e button is not
illuminated.
Press e button briefly. The indicator lamp in the
button illuminates.
Press button e for more than 2 seconds, the side
windows and the sliding/pop-up roof will be closed. The
indicator lamp in the button illuminates.
Switch off activated charcoal filter:
The indicator lamp in the button e is illuminated.
Switching off activated carbon filter and activating
convenience opening:
Press e button briefly. The indicator lamp in the
button goes out.
The indicator lamp in the e button is illuminated.
The system switches automatically to the air
recirculation mode, if the carbon monoxide (CO) or
nitrogen oxides (NOX) concentration of the outside air
increases beyond a predetermined level.
Press button e for more than 2 seconds, the side
windows and the sliding/pop-up roof return to the
position they were in before closing. The indicator lamp
in the button goes out.
The automatic air recirculation mode does not function
if economy mode S is selected or if the outside
temperature has fallen below 40°F (5°C).
A window or the sliding/pop-up roof opened manually
after convenience closing will no longer be returned to
the position it was in before closing when convenience
opening is selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Economy mode
To switch the automatic climate control on again, press
the U or P button, or set air volume control
switch to any speed.
The function of this setting corresponds to the
automatic mode. However, because the air conditioning
compressor will not engage (fuel savings), it is not
possible to air condition in this setting.
Residual engine heat utilization
Press S button to activate. The indicator lamp in the
button illuminates.
With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue
to heat or ventilate the interior for a short while. Air
volume and distribution are controlled automatically.
Press S button once again to return to the previous
setting. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
To select:
Important!
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 0 or remove it altogether.
In the S mode the windows could fog up on the
inside. Switch off S mode.
Press button T. The indicator lamp in the button
illuminates.
Automatic climate control - OFF/ON
This function selection will not activate if the battery
level is insufficient.
To switch the automatic climate control off, set the air
volume control switch to position 0.
The function switches off automatically:
The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off.
• if the electronic key in starter switch is turned to
position 2,
While driving, use this setting only temporarily,
otherwise the windshield could fog up.
• after approximately 30 minutes,
• if the battery voltage drops.
Automatic climate control
157
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
158
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power.
To keep the battery drain to a minimum, turn off the
defroster as soon as the rear window is clear.
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 2.
To select:
The defroster is automatically turned off after
approximately 6–17 minutes of operation depending on
the outside temperature and vehicle speed.
Press the F button in the control panel of the
automatic air conditioner. The indicator lamp in the
button illuminates.
If several power consumers are turned on
simultaneously, or the battery is only partially charged,
it is possible that the defroster will automatically turn
itself off. When this happens, the indicator lamp inside
the switch starts blinking.
To cancel:
Press the F button in the control panel of the
automatic air conditioner. The indicator lamp in the
button goes out.
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
defroster automatically turns itself back on.
Note:
Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be removed
before activating the defroster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front center console storage compartment
ventilation
The air volume is dependent on the setting of:
• air distribution control,
• air volume control,
• air outlets in the dashboard.
The air temperature is about the same as that of the
dashboard air outlets. It cannot be regulated separately.
Notes:
The compartment can get very warm due to its confined
space. When storing heat sensitive objects in the
compartment, close the air outlet while heating the
passenger compartment.
Do not allow articles to obstruct the air outlet in the
storage compartment.
The front center console compartment has its own air
outlet.
To open: Raise lever (1).
To close: Lower lever (1).
Automatic climate control
159
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
160
Car care
Index
Automatic climate control
Rear passenger compartment adjustable air outlets
1 Center air outlet, left
2 Air volume control for center air outlets
To open: Turn the wheel upward.
3 Center air outlet, right
Note:
The temperature at the air outlets for the rear passenger
compartment (1 and 3) is the same as at the dashboard
center air outlets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio and telephone operation
Operating safety
Warning!
These instructions are intended to help you become
acquainted with your Mercedes-Benz audio system.
They contain useful tips and a detailed description of
the user functions.
Any alterations made to electronic components can
cause malfunctions.
The radio, cassette deck, CD changer1 and
telephone1 are interconnected. Therefore, when
one of the components is defective or has not been
removed/replaced properly this may impair the
function of other components.
Warning!
In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an
accident, system settings should be entered with
the vehicle at standstill and systems should be
operated by the driver only when traffic conditions
permit. Always pay full attention to traffic
conditions first before operating system controls
while driving.
These malfunctions might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service work or
alterations to electronic components done at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a
distance of 50 feet (approximately14 m) every
second.
1
Opti onaelqui pment
Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction
system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Audio system
161
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
162
Car care
Index
Audio system
Operating and display elements
1 On/off, volume, see page 164
4 Radio mode selector, see page 167
2 Telephone mode selector, see page 178
5 Manual tuning, see page 168 and 168
Fast Forward/Reverse (tape), see page 172
Fast Forward/Reverse (CD), see page 177
Telephone book, see page 179
3 Seek tuning, see page 168,
Track search (tape), see page 172,
Skipping tracks (CD), see page 176
Manual repeat dialing (telephone), see page 181
6 CD mode selector, see page 176
7 Tape mode selector, see page 170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Display panel
10 Scan tuning (Radio, see page 168)
Tape track search, see page 172
CD, see page 168
The cassette slot is located behind the display panel.
For notes on playing cassettes, see page 170
9 Alpha-numeric keypad for
station storage and frequency entry, see page 170
optional telephone, see page 178
Tape eject, see page 171
11 Function button, see page 170 and 178
12 Soft keys for
radio band selection, see page 167
tone controls, see page 165
scan, see page 168
Tape track select, see page 172
Dolby, see page 173
CD track access, see page 178
13 Tape eject, see page 170
Audio system
163
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
164
Car care
Index
Audio system
Button and soft key operation
Operation
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric keypad (right
side of radio face) and the function buttons (left side of
the radio face) are referred to as “buttons” and the four
keys under the display are referred to as “soft keys”
Switching on and off
Press the control knob
.
The system is switched off when the electronic key in
the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed.
The radio is switched on again when the electronic key
in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or 2.
Note:
Do not press directly on the radio display face.
Note:
The system can also be switched on separately with the
electronic key removed, but will switch itself off
automatically after half an hour to conserve vehicle
battery power.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the volume
Bass
Turning the control knob clockwise will increase the
volume, counterclockwise will decrease the volume.
Press the “AUD” key
repeatedly until “BASS”
appears on the display.
Note:
Press the “+” key to increase
The volume setting can be selected separately for the
telephone, audio system and voice recognition system.
or the “-” key to decrease the level.
Pressing the “+” and “-” keys simultaneously resets the
Bass to its center (flat) level.
Audio functions
Treble
The “AUD” key is used to select the BASS, TREBLE,
FADER and BALANCE functions. Settings for bass and
treble are stored separately for the radio, cassette and
CD modes. Tone level settings are identified by the
vertical bars. The center (flat) setting is shown by one
longer bar in the center of the display.
Press the “AUD” key
repeatedly until “TREBLE”
appears on the display.
Press the “+” key to increase
or the “-” key to decrease the level.
Pressing the “+” and “-” keys simultaneously resets the
Treble to its center (flat) level.
Audio system
165
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
166
Car care
Index
Audio system
Fader
Centering all audio functions
Press the “AUD” key
Push and hold down the
“AUD” key. All audio
functions (bass, treble,
balance and fader) are set to
center or flat positions, and
repeatedly until “FADER”
appears on the display. Press
the “R” key to move the sound
to the rear speakers or the “F”
key to move the sound to the front speakers.
the volume is adjusted to a preset level. “RESET”
appears on the display.
Pressing the “F” and “R” keys simultaneously resets the
Fader to its center level.
Balance
Press the “AUD” key
repeatedly until “BALANCE”
appears on the display.
Press the “L” key to move the
sound to the left speakers or the “R” key to move the
sound to the right speakers.
Pressing the “L” and “R” keys simultaneously resets the
Balance to its center level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio system tone level selection
To select the tone level
Radio mode
settings for radio, cassette,
and CD operation press the
key “AUD”. The tone level
Selecting radio mode
Press
button.
settings menu is now
displayed. Press key “EXT”, and “SOUND” appears on
the display.
Selecting the band
Press the key located below
the desired band. The band
selected is shown in the top
line of the display.
Press the key “DRV” to adjust the sound to the “Driver”
and co-driver position.
The key “SP” is for “Speech”, optimizing the sound for
spoken language.
Frequency ranges:
FM
87.9 -107.9 MHz
530 -1710 kHz
approx.162 MHz
The key “AMB” offers “Ambience” , a three-dimensional
sound.
AM
WB
The key “OFF” switches off the tone level setting
selection.
Audio system
167
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
168
Car care
Index
Audio system
Manual tuning
Seek tuning
Press either the
or
Press either the
to the next receivable station.
or
button. The radio will tune
button. Step-by-step station
tuning in ascending or
descending order of
Scan tuning
frequency will take place.
SC #
Press the
button. Each
The first three tuning steps will take place without
muting. The radio will then be muted and high-speed
tuning will take place until the button is released.
The following tuning intervals will be shown on the
display:
strongly receivable station on
the band selected will be
tuned in for 8 seconds. The
first scan will tune only the
stations with a high signal strength. The second scan
will tune every receivable station. By pressing either the
SC #
FM
AM
WB
200 kHz
,
,
,
buttons or the
button the
10 kHz
scan mode can be cancelled.
Channels 1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weather Band
Storing stations automatically (Autostore)
Press the “AS” key until the
Press the “WB” key. The last weather band station is
tuned in.
word “SEARCH” is displayed.
The ten strongest stations are
stored automatically, with
having the strongest
signal.
7
Use buttons
-
to select a different station. If
PQRS
the station cannot be received, the next available station
is selected automatically.
Press button
or
. The next available station is
If less than 10 stations are available within receiving
range, only those will be stored.
tuned in. The message “WB NONE” appears if no station
can be received.
Pressing a station selection button without a stored
station will not display a frequency for approximately
2 seconds. Thereafter the station selected last will be
displayed.
Station memory
Ten stations each in the AM and FM bands can be stored
via the alpha-numeric keypad. The
0
OPR
button
corresponds to location 10. Weatherband (WB)
channels 1 to 7 are preset at the factory and can be
retrieved via the alpha-numeric keypad, but cannot be
changed.
Note:
Autostore memory is in addition to the regular station
memory. Previously stored stations are not erased.
Briefly press “AS” to leave the Autostore and return to
manual presets. Press “AS” again to call up Autostore.
Audio system
169
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
170
Car care
Index
Audio system
Storing stations
Hold the desired number button
approximately 2 seconds. The currently displayed
frequency is stored on the selected station button. The
storage procedure is confirmed by a short signal tone.
Cassette mode
0
-
OPR
down for
Playing cassettes
TAPE
EJ
Press the
button. When the
button is pressed,
the display folds down and the cassette slot becomes
visible. Push the cassette gently into the slot until it
engages. The cassette will be pulled in automatically.
Retrieving a station from memory
0
OPR
Press the desired station button
-
.
Note:
Do not press directly on the display face.
Direct frequency input (AM and FM only)
Select the band. Press the
Return the display panel to its normal position by
folding it back up and pressing gently on the display
frame to lock in place.
“ button and enter the
desired frequency using the
alpha-numeric keypad
-
Important!
0
OPR
. Frequencies outside of
If the display is in the down position for more than
20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will
continue at 5 second intervals until the display is
returned to its normal position.
the frequency ranges (frequencies specified on
page 167) will not be accepted. The frequency input
mode is cancelled if no button is pressed within
4 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system will switch to
cassette mode. Track 1 will be
played and “SIDE 1”
displayed. Track 1 is the side
of the cassette which is facing
Cassette eject
EJ
Press the
button. The display will fold down and
the cassette will be ejected. Remove the cassette, then
fold the display back up manually. The system will
switch back to radio mode automatically.
upwards. The cassette deck will automatically detect the
type of tape and switch the equalization automatically.
A cassette symbol on the display indicates that a tape is
in the mechanism. This symbol appears in all modes
except cassette mode.
Notes:
The cassette will not be ejected when the system is
switched off. If a cassette is not ejected, continue to hold
EJ
the
button for at least 5 seconds to eject the
The cassette will not be ejected when the system is
switched off or another mode is selected.
cassette.
If a cassette is in the mechanism, cassette mode can be
Important!
TAPE
selected by using the
button.
If the display is in the down position for more than
20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will
continue at 5 second intervals until the display is
returned to its normal position.
If no cassette has been inserted, the display will show
“NO TAPE”.
Audio system
171
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
172
Car care
Index
Audio system
Track selection
Note:
The beginning of a track can only be located if there is a
break of at least 4 seconds between tracks.
Press the track selection
“TRK” key. The current track
will be displayed as “SIDE 1”
or “SIDE 2”. The track will be
changed automatically at the
end of the tape.
Fast forward/reverse
Press the
button.
“FORWARD” will appear on
the display and fast forward
will start.
Track search forward/backward
Press the
button.
Press the
button.
“SEEK FWD” will be shown on
the display and the track
search will run the tape
forward to the start of the next
track.
“REWIND” will appear on the
display and fast reverse will
start.
Fast forward/reverse is stopped by pressing the same
button again, or it will stop automatically at the
beginning or the end of the tape. The track will
automatically change at the end or beginning of the tape
and play will begin.
Press the
“SEEK RWD” will be shown
on the display and the track
button.
search will run the tape
backward to the start of the
track currently playing. Track search can be interrupted
by pressing the same button again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
Dolby NR1 (noise reduction system)
To enable optimum sound
SC #
Press the
button. “SEEK
FWD” will appear on the
display. Each track will be
played for 8 seconds in
reproduction of cassettes
recorded using the Dolby B
system, press the “NR” key so
ascending order. The search
the “NR” on the display is
SC #
wi thisetooaf,plnl,y,f,
buttons are pressed.
highlighted. To turn off Dolby B noise reduction, press
the “NR” key so the “NR” on the display is not
highlighted.
Skipping of blank sections (Skip-Blank)
Press the “SB” key. The Skip-
1
Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction
system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Blank function is switched on
or off. When switched on, the
“SB” on the display is
highlighted.
With the “SB” function activated and no sound signal
received for approximately 10 to 15 seconds, the tape
will fast forward to the next sound signal.
Audio system
173
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
174
Car care
Index
Audio system
CD mode
Only use CDs, which bear the
label shown and that conform to
the compact disc digital audio
standard (IEC 60908).
General notes on CD mode
Should excessive temperatures occur while in CD mode,
“CD TEMP HIGH” will appear on the display and muting
will take place. The unit will then switch back to radio
mode until the temperature has decreased to a safe
operating level.
Use of CDs which do not meet this
standard may cause damage to the
CD changer. Do not play single-CDs (80 mm) with an
adapter.
Should temperatures occur while in CD mode which are
too low, “CD TEMP LOW” will be displayed, but the CD
will play. It will be sensitive to skipping if you are
driving over rough roads.
Warning!
The CD changer1 is a Class 1 laser product. There is
a danger of invisible laser radiation if the cover is
opened or damaged.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during
playback.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer1 does not
contain any parts which can be serviced by the
user. For safety reasons, have any service work
which may be necessary performed only by
qualified personnel.
Avoid fingerprints and dust on CDs. Do not write on the
CDs or apply any label or other material or devices to
the CDs.
Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially
available cleaning cloth. No solvents, anti-static sprays,
etc. should be used.
1
Opti onaelqui pment
Replace the CD in its container after use. Protect CDs
from heat and direct sunlight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD changer1 installed
Loading/emptying the CD magazine
Slide the changer door to the right until it latches open
and press the eject button
. The magazine will be
ejected. Remove the magazine. Pull out the CD tray to its
stop and place the CDs in the recess of the tray, label
side up. Push the tray into the magazine in the direction
shown by the arrow. Insert the loaded magazine into the
changer.
4
2
3
1
Important!
Close the door after the magazine has been inserted.
2
1 CD changer
2 CD magazine
3 CD tray
4 CD
If a CD changer1 is installed, it can be operated from the
front control panel of the radio. A loaded magazine must
be installed for CD playing.
1
Optional equipment
Audio system
175
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
176
Car care
Index
Audio system
Playing CDs
Press the
Skipping tracks forward/backward
button. When the changer is used for the
Press the
played.
button. The next track on the CD will be
first time after removing/inserting a magazine, play
begins at CD 1 track 1. After that, the CD most recently
played will start at the point where it was last switched
off. CDs stored in the magazine can be selected by using
the station preset buttons 1-6.
Press the
button. If the track has been playing for
more than10 seconds, it will revert to the start of that
track. If it has been playing for less than ten seconds it
will revert to the preceding track. To skip several tracks,
the respective button must be pressed until the desired
track is reached. If the beginning or end of the CD is
reached during the search, the first or last track will be
played.
The magazine slot number of
the selected CD will be
displayed after “CD”. The
number of the track being
played will be displayed after
“TRACK”.
If there is no CD in the
selected magazine slot,
“NO CD” and the
corresponding slot number
will be displayed
(e.g.“NO CD3”). After the last track on a CD has been
played, the next CD will automatically be selected and
played.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the
Press and hold the
Random play/repeat function
button for audible fast forward.
button for audible reverse.
The tracks of the current CD are played in random order
when the random feature (RDM) is selected. Press the
“RDM” key to switch on. “RDM” will be highlighted.
Press “RDM” again to switch off.
The search will stop when the
button is released. The played
time of the track will be
displayed during the search.
The search mode will cancel if
When the repeat function
(RPT) has been selected, a
particular track can be played
for as many times as desired.
the beginning or end of the CD is reached.
Press the “RPT” key to switch
on. “RPT” will be highlighted. Press “RPT” again to
switch off.
Scanning
SC #
Press the
button. Each track will be played for
Note:
8 seconds in ascending order. The search will stop at the
curtrhrieaenocaft,kn,y,f,
SC #
Both functions cannot be used simultaneously.
buttons are pressed.
Audio system
177
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
178
Car care
Index
Audio system
Direct track selection
Telephone operation
Various functions of the Mercedes-Benz integrated
portable cellular telephone1 can be performed and
displayed via the system. Further instructions for
operating the integrated telephone can be found in the
operation guide for the telephone1.
Tracks can be selected directly using the buttons on the
alpha-numeric keypad. Press the “ function button,
followed by the track number.
Track and time display
Pressing the function button
“T” displays the track number
and elapsed playing time of
the track being played.
Switching the telephone on and off
Switching on:
Press the
button.
Switching off:
Press and hold the
appears on the display.
Pressing the function button “T” again displays the total
number of tracks and the total playing time of the CD
being played. After 8 seconds the display switches back
to the main display.
button until “PHONE OFF”
1
Opti onaelqui pment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the volume
Calling up the telephone book
Turning the control knob clockwise will increase the
volume, counterclockwise will decrease the volume.
The numbers stored in the telephone number memory
can be called up via either name or number entries. The
memory contents from the portable telephone must
contain numbers and names in at least one memory
location and the portable telephone must be connected
to the vehicle coil cord in order to call up the telephone
book. Refer to the “Memory download” section of the
cellular telephone operation guide for more information.
Note:
The volume setting can be selected separately for the
telephone, audio system and voice recognition system.
Entering telephone number and starting dialing
process
Switching between name search and number search
Press “ABC” key - Name search
Enter the desired telephone
number using the alpha-
numeric keypad. The number
Press “NUM” key - Number search
can have up to 32 digits, but
only 13 of these can be
displayed. The dialing process is started by pressing the
“SND” key. The entered number can be corrected using
the “CLR” key.
Press the “CLR” key briefly, and the last digit will be
deleted.
Press and hold the “CLR” key, and the complete number
will be deleted.
Audio system
179
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
180
Car care
Index
Audio system
Searching and selecting telephone book entries by
name
Searching and selecting telephone book entries by
number
Press the “ABC” key. The
current name is shown on the
display. The stored entries in
alphabetical order can be
Press the “NUM” key. The
current number is shown on
the display. The stored entries
can be selected in numerical
selected using the
or
order using the
or
button. By pressing the or button, the
stored entries can be selected according to alphabetical
initial letters (e.g. A-Adam, B-Brown, M-Miller).
button. By pressing the
entries can be selected in increments of 5 (e.g. Entry
no. 2, Entry no. 7, etc.).
or button, the stored
0
OPR
Using the buttons
-
on the alpha-numeric
keypad the stored entries can be selected according
initial letters (e.g. B-Brown, press button 2 twice).
Placing a call
When a number or a name
has been selected using the
method described above,
press the “SND” key.
Note:
Some signs and symbols cannot be displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual repeat dialing (redial)
Abbreviated dialing from previously stored
telephone numbers
The last number entered can be re-selected by pressing
the “SND” key once, and the call can be placed by
pressing the “SND” key a second time. The last dialed
telephone number is shown on the display. Using the
Quick-dialing
Enter the previously selected
,
,
or
button, the numbers stored in
maximum 3-digit (1 - 999)
number and press “RCL”.
the re-dial memory of the telephone can be selected.
The abbreviation L and the
number in the memory are
shown in the top line of the
display.
The telephone number
previously stored under that number will be displayed.
Press the soft key “SND”. The call is set up.
Speed-dialing
Automatic repeat dialing (redial)
Enter the memory location desired with buttons
-
If no call can be placed, press the “SND” key.
0
OPR
. You can enter up to 2 digits.
“REDIAL” is shown on the display and repeated
attempts will be made for the next four minutes.
To correct the last digit press the soft key “CLR”.
Press the soft key “SND”. The phone number stored at
this memory location will appear on the screen and the
call is set up.
The abbreviation “L” and the number in the memory are
shown in the top line of the display.
Audio system
181
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
182
Car care
Index
Audio system
Express-dialing
Accepting incoming call in telephone mode
0
Press one of the number buttons
than 1 second.
-
OPR
for more
With an incoming call, a
ringing tone can be heard and
the message “CALL” appears
on the display. Press the
The phone number or the name stored at this memory
location will appear on the screen.
“SND” key to answer the call.
When the call is initiated, the call time will appear on
the display.
Accepting incoming call in tape, CD or radio mode
Note:
If the telephone is activated in the background (symbol
“S” on the display), then a switch is made automatically
to the telephone mode when a call is received. The audio
source is muted, the ringing tone is heard and the
message “CALL” appears. Press the soft key “SND” to
answer the call. After the call has been terminated, the
previously selected audio source is resumed.
Please be aware that button
reserved for an emergency call number, see page 184.
might already be
Call hold feature
While on the telephone, a second call can be accepted
by pressing the “SND” key. The first call will be put on
hold. Press “SND” to toggle between the calls.
An additional call can be accepted after ending one of
the previous calls.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminating call
Component malfunctions
A current call can be terminated by pressing the “END”
button.
The radio, CD changer1, and Mercedes-Benz integrated
cellular telephone1 are part of a fiberoptic networked
system. Failure of one of the components can lead to
malfunctions of the other components. Please contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100 for more information in the
event of a malfunction.
Muting a call
Pressing the “MUT” key will
silence the call. The caller can
no longer hear you. To return
to the conversation, press the
“MUT” key again.
1
Opti onaelqui pment
Audio system
183
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
184
Car care
Index
Audio system
Emergency call
Emergency calls may not be possible with all telephone
networks or if certain network services and/or
telephone functions are active. Check with your local
network operating company. It may take some time to
set up an emergency call.
Important!
If you press button
number stored in memory location 1 (for example 911)
will be dialed.
for more than 1 second, the
To use this function you must ensure that the number
stored in memory location 1 is the number to be dialed
in case of emergency.
The 911 emergency call system is a public service.
Using it without due cause is a criminal offence.
You can make an emergency call to an emergency
rescue station with a mobile communications network.
Note:
If an emergency call cannot be
connected, the message
“SYSTM BUSY” appears.
The emergency call will be placed as long as the
corresponding mobile communications network is
available. To do this, switch the telephone on if you have
not already done so.
The call will also be placed if the unlock-code is not
entered.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power windows
Switches for:
1 left, front
2 right, front
3 left, rear
4 right, rear
There are individual switches in the front passenger
door and the rear doors for the respective windows.
Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1 or 2.
Opening the windows:
Press the switch to resistance point.
P54.25-2259-26
Closing the windows:
Pull the switch to resistance point.
The control panel is located on the driver’s door.
Release switch when window is in desired position.
Interior equipment
185
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
186
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Express opening and closing
Warning!
Press or pull switch past resistance point and release –
window opens or closes completely.
When closing the windows, be sure that there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
To interrupt procedure, briefly press or pull switch.
In case of obstruction, the automatic reversal will
not operate if a door window is being closed by
pulling the switch to its resistance point and
holding it there, or when using the electronic key.
If the upward movement of the window is blocked
during the closing procedure, the window will stop
during the last few inches before closure and open
slightly.
The closing procedure of door windows can be
immediately reversed by either pressing or pulling
the switch, or pressing button Πon the
electronic key and holding it.
When pulling and holding the switch to close the
window, and upward movement of the window is
blocked during the last few inches before closure, it will
stop but not open slightly.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
electronic key from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause
serious personal injury.
The windows can also be opened and closed using:
• the summer opening/convenience feature, see
page 34.
• the button O in the control panel of the
automatic climate control, see page 155.
• the button e in the control panel of the
automatic climate control, see page 156.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blocking of rear door window operation
Synchronizing power windows
If the power supply was interrupted, (battery
disconnected or low), the windows cannot be opened or
closed by the express feature.
To resynchronize the express feature, pull switch until
the window is completely closed and hold for
approximately 1 second. Repeat procedure for each
window.
The automatic full opening and closing procedure of the
windows should now be restored.
The switch (1) is located on the driver’s door.
If no operation of the rear windows by switch (for
instance by children) is desired, slide override
switch (1) to the right; the N symbol becomes
visible.
Operation of the rear door windows with the switches
located in the driver’s door is still possible.
Interior equipment
187
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
188
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Sliding/pop-up roof
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
To open, close, raise or lower the sliding/pop-up roof:
Move the switch to resistance point in the required
direction.
Release the switch when the roof has reached the
required position.
Warning!
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
electronic key from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause
serious personal injury.
1 to slide roof open
2 to slide roof closed
3 to raise roof at rear
4 to lower roof at rear
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Opening or closing the sliding/pop-up roof
automatically
With the roof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid
into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When
sliding the roof open, the screen will also retract.
Move the switch past resistance point in the direction
required and release.
The sliding/pop-up roof can also be opened and closed
using:
The sliding/pop-up roof opens or closes completely.
• the summer opening/convenience feature, see
Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof:
Move the switch in any direction.
page 34.
• the button O in the control panel of the
If the movement of the sliding/pop-up roof is blocked
during the closing procedure, the roof will stop and
reopen slightly.
automatic climate control, see page 155.
• the button ein the control panel of the
automatic climate control, see page 156.
Warning!
Notes:
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any
objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the
sliding/pop-up roof.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
electronic key from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause
serious personal injury.
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed
manually should an electrical malfunction occur, see
page 349.
Interior equipment
189
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
190
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof
The sliding/pop-up roof must be resynchronized if the
power supply has been interrupted (battery
disconnected or low), the sliding/pop-up roof has been
closed manually or the sliding/pop-up roof does not
open smoothly or malfunctions.
• Press the switch in the “raise” (3) direction, wait
until the sliding/pop-up roof is fully raised at rear
and hold the switch for approximately 1 second.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior lighting
The interior lighting remains switched off, even
when centrally unlocking the vehicle or opening a
door or the electronic key is removed from the
starter switch.
4 To select automatic function:
Press the rocker switch to the center position.
Interior lamps are switched on in darkness, when
unlocking the vehicle, opening a door or removing
the electronic key from starter switch.
Interior lamps are switched off (soft fade) delayed,
when locking the vehicle, closing the doors or
inserting the electronic key in starter switch.
However, there will be no delay when the electronic
key is in starter switch position 2.
1 Rear interior lights
5 Interior lamps, front:
Press rocker switch in to switch front interior lamps
on. The interior lighting stays on while the rocker
switch is pressed in.
Press the button to switch the rear passenger
compartment lights on/off.
2 Right front reading lamp
Switching off the front interior lighting:
Press rocker switch to position (3) or (4).
Press the button to switch the reading lamp on or
off. The right reading lamp will be switched on or
off.
6 Left front reading lamp:
Press the button to switch the reading lamp on or
off. The left reading lamp will be switched on or off.
3 To switch off automatic function:
Press the rocker switch.
Interior equipment
191
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
192
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Notes:
Door entry lamps
The time delay for the interior light to switch off after
the electronic key is removed from the starter switch
can be adjusted in the individual setting menu
“LIGHTING” – “INT. ILLUMINATION DELAYED
SWITCH-OFF”. See page 122.
The appropriate entry lamp switches on if a door is
opened in darkness and if the interior lighting is
switched to automatic function.
The entry lamp switches off automatically when the
door is closed.
To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged
with doors open, all interior lamps switch off after
approximately 5 minutes, when the electronic key
removed or in starter switch position 0.
An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out
automatically. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that
all interior lamps are switched off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sun visors
Vanity mirrors
1 Illuminated vanity mirror
Swing sun visors (2) down (arrow 3) to protect against
sun glare.
With the visor engaged in its inner mounting (2),
the lamp (4) can be switched on by opening the
cover (3).
If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage sun
visor (2) from the inner mounting (1) and pivot to the
side.
Fold the cover (3) down to close the vanity mirror.
Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Interior equipment
193
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
194
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Interior
Storage compartments and armrests
Warning!
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or
sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing
things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than
the seat backs.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to
prevent stored objects from being thrown about
and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident.
Always use partition net when transporting cargo.
Partition net cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glove box
Notes:
Prior to closing the glove box, close the compartment for
glasses first.
The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the
mechanical key. See page 29 for instructions on how to
remove the mechanical key from the electronic key (e.g.
for valet parking service).
1 Unlocked position
2 Locked position
3 Glove box
4 Glove box lid release
Pull to open
Interior equipment
195
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
196
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Storage compartment in front of armrest
To open:
Slide cover (5) rearward.
To close:
Slide cover (5) forward.
Note:
The compartment contains a lighter (see page 202), a
coin holder, and a cup holder (see page 198).
5 Storage compartment in front of armrest
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage compartment below the front armrest
To change inclination of armrest:
Pull up on armrest.
To lower armrest:
Pull handle (7).
Notes:
The storage compartment can be heated or cooled, see
page 159.
The compartment can get very warm due to its confined
space. When storing heat sensitive objects in the
compartment, close the air outlet while heating the
passenger compartment.
P68.00-2592-26
Do not obstruct the air outlet in the storage
compartment.
To open compartment in armrest:
Lift armrest by handle (6).
To open compartment under armrest:
Lift armrest by handle (7).
To close:
Lower armrest until it engages in lock.
Interior equipment
197
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
198
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Cup holder
P68.00-2715-26
P68.00-2715-26
1 Cup holder in front seat armrest
Close cup holder:
Push (arrow) until cup holder engages.
Open cup holder:
Push button (1) the cup holder slides out.
Warning!
Keep the cup holder closed while traveling. Place
only containers that fit into the cup holder to
prevent spills. Do not fill containers to a height
where the contents could spill during vehicle
maneuvers, especially hot liquids.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open:
Push front of sliding compartment – the cup holder
slides out.
To close:
Push the sliding compartment back until it engages.
Warning!
Keep the cup holder closed while traveling. Place
only containers that fit into the cup holder to
prevent spills. Do not fill containers to a height
where the contents could spill during vehicle
maneuvers, especially hot liquids.
2 Cup holder in rear seat armrest
Interior equipment
199
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
200
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Ashtrays
Center console
To open:
Briefly touch the mark on the cover, the ashtray opens
automatically.
To remove ashtray insert from center console:
Warning!
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing
still. With the gear selector lever in position “N”,
turn off the engine and set the parking brake.
Otherwise the vehicle might move as a result of
unintended contact with the gear selector lever.
Slide ashtray insert in direction of arrow (1) until the
insert disengages. Grip ashtray insert at indents (left
and right arrows) and remove from ashtray frame.
Prior to removing the ashtray insert, move the gear
selector lever to position “N”.
To replace insert:
Install insert into ashtray frame and push down to
engage into place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear seats
To open ashtray:
Pull at top of cover.
To remove insert:
Press latch (2) and remove insert.
To replace insert:
Install insert and close the ashtray.
Interior equipment
Instruments
201
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
and controls
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
202
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Lighter
Turn the electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
Push in lighter in (1); it will pop out automatically when
hot.
Warning!
Never touch the heating element or sides of the
lighter, they are extremely hot, hold at knob only.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause serious personal injury.
P68.00-2714-26
Note:
1 Center console lighter
The lighter can be operated with electronic key in
starter switch position 1 or 2.
The lighter is located in the center console compartment
in front of the armrest, see page 196.
The lighter socket can be used to accommodate
electrical accessories up to a maximum 85 W.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
Ski sack (optional)
A small convenience parcel net is located in the front
passenger footwell. It is for small and light items, such
as road maps, mail, etc.
Warning!
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects
having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside
the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants.
Unfolding and loading
1. Fold armrest down (arrow).
2. Swing cover (1) down.
Interior equipment
203
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
204
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
3. Open hook and loop strap (2) and pull ski sack into
passenger compartment and unfold.
4. Open flap in trunk by pulling handle (3).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Wrap strap around ski sack and armrest.
5. From trunk, slide skis into ski sack
7. Close clasp (arrows 4 and 5) and pull strap tight to
immobilize skis.
Warning!
The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs of skis.
Do not load the ski sack with other objects.
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an accident,
an unfastened ski sack can cause injury to vehicle
occupants.
Interior equipment
205
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
206
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
8. Connect snap hook (6) of front strap to eye (7)
located on center tunnel in front of rear seat bench.
Unloading and folding
1. Loosen strap, open clasp by pressing tabs (arrows)
together, and unload skis.
2. Close flap in trunk.
3. Disconnect snap hook (6) from eye (7).
4. Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise and place
folded ski sack inside recess of backrest.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal of ski sack
For removal of the ski sack we recommend that you
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
Never drive vehicle with trunk lid open while the
ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
Note:
To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the
trunk, always close the pass-through.
5. Close ski sack compartment cover.
Interior equipment
207
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
208
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Parcel net in trunk
There is a parcel net located on left side of the trunk.
Dependent on the equipment of your vehicle, there is
another parcel net located on right side of the trunk.
Warning!
The parcel net is designed only to carry light loads.
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects
having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside
the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants.
Removal of parcel net:
Slide rails (1) upward and remove.
Installation of parcel net:
Place mounting lugs (2) in opening and slide rails (1)
down as far as they can go.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical outlet
Storage compartment under trunk floor
1
P68.00-2480-26
The electrical outlet is located in the rear compartment.
Electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2.
To open trunk floor:
Press handle (1) on the recess and lift trunk cover.
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug (cigar lighter
type).
The compartment can be used to store small, light or flat
objects.
Note:
The electrical outlet can be used to accommodate
accessories (e.g. air pump, auxilary lamps) up to a
maximum 180 W.
Interior equipment
209
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
210
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
To close trunk floor:
Retractable luggage cover and partition net
Lower the cover and lock by applying light pressure to
the handle (1).
The twin reel roller blind comprises a luggage cover and
a partition net. It is mounted on the backrest of the rear
seat and can also be used with backrest folded down.
Warning!
Partition net
Warning!
If items are stored in the compartment, make sure
compartment is securely closed.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the
vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or
sudden maneuver, always use partition net when
transporting cargo.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Partition net with rear seats folded up
Partition net with rear seats folded down
1
2
2
1
2
2
P68.00-2481-26
P68.00-2487-26
1 Tab
1 Tab
2 Eyelets on roof
2 Eyelets on roof
Pull out upper blind (safety net)by tabs (1) and engage
into eyelets on the roof (2).
Pull out upper blind (safety net) by tabs (1) until it
engages.
Fold seat forward, see page 213.
Pull out upper blind fully and clip into eyelets on the
roof (2).
Interior equipment
211
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
212
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Luggage cover
Removal, installation of twin-reel roller blind
2
2
1
3
P68.00-2488-26
P68.00-2489-26
1 Handle
The safety net and luggage cover must be retracted.
Removal:
2 To lock – pull luggage cover back by handle (1) until
it locks into position.
Fold up split rear bench seat, see page 213.
Slide twin-reel roller blind (1) to left and remove.
3 To unlock – press handle (1) down and release. The
luggage cover retracts automatically.
Installation:
Note:
Fold up split rear bench seat.
With the luggage cover rolled up, fold the lip down.
Place twin-reel roller blind into right and left guide
rails (2) and slide towards right to the end stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Split rear bench seat
Folding the backrest forward
The two sections can be folded down separately to
enlarge the cargo area.
Warning!
When expanding the luggage compartment, always
fold the seat cushions fully forward and always use
the partition net when transporting cargo.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the backrests
must remain properly locked in the upright
position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in
the vehicle.
P91.10-2302-26
Pull release handle (1) and fold seat cushion (2)
forward.
Always use the cargo tie down rings, see page 218.
Interior equipment
213
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
214
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Illustration: right-hand side of rear seat.
Slip seat belt webbing behind retainer (3).
Retract head restraints fully and fold rearward, see
page 53.
Pull release handle (4) on the left or right backrest as
required.
Fold the rear seat backrests (5) forward.
Note:
With the twin-reel roller blind installed: When folding
the backrest forward, fold the right section first and
then the left section. If only the left section is to be
folded, first remove the twin-reel roller blind, see
page 212.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding the backrest rearward
Fold the backrest (5) rearward until it engages.
Fold the seat cushions (2) rearward until they lock into
position.
Interior equipment
215
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
216
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
.
Warning!
If a red indicator is visible with the seatback up,
then the seatback is not properly locked into
position.
Always lock backrest in its upright position when
rear seat bench is occupied, or the extended cargo
area is not in use. Check for secure locking by
pushinng and pulling on the backrest.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in
the vehicle.
If the backrest is not locked into position, a red
indicator (6) will be visible. Check for secure locking by
pushing and pulling on the backrest.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or
sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting
cargo.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading instructions
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle
depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore
recommended to load the vehicle according to the
illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against front or rear
seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept
as low as possible since it influences the handling
characteristics of the vehicle.
P68.00-2153-26
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and
luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity
weight indicated on the certification tag which can be
found on the left door pillar.
Interior equipment
217
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
218
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Warning!
Cargo tie-down rings
Always fasten items being carried as securely as
possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in
the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or
sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting
cargo.
Never drive vehicle with tailgate open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle
interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
P68.00-2482-26
Four rings (arrows) are located in the cargo
compartment.
Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all
rings with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the
cargo.
Always follow loading instructions, see page 217.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cellular telephone
The vehicle is prepared for the installation of a cellular
telephone. For further information and installation
contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether
or not prohibited by law, for safety reasons, the
driver should not use the cellular telephone while
the vehicle is in motion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before answering
or placing a call.
Interior equipment
219
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
220
Car care
Index
Interior equipment
Telephone, general
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/
her primary focus when driving. For your safety
and the safety of others, we recommend that you
pull over to a safe location and stop before placing
or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the hands-free
device and only use the telephone when road and
traffic conditions permit.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a
built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being
connected to an external antenna) from inside the
vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could
lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic
system, possibly resulting in an accident and
personal injury.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
See separate instruction manual for instructions on how
to operate the telephone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Garage door opener
The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to
three separately controlled objects.
Warning!
When programming a garage door opener, the door
moves up or down.
When programming or operating the remote
control make sure there is no possibility of anyone
being harmed by the moving door.
2
1
Note:
Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible
with the integrated opener. If you should experience
difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA
only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
3
1 Signal transmitter keys
2 Indicator lamp
3 Hand-held remote control transmitter
Garage door opener
221
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
222
Car care
Index
Garage door opener
For operation in the USA only: This device complies
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Programming or reprogramming the integrated
remote control:
1. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the
device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 inches
(5 cm to 12 cm) away from the surface of the
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
integrated remote control located on the inside rear
view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-
held transmitter button and the desired integrated
remote control button. Do not release the buttons
until completing step 4.
Rolling code programming:
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code
devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these
instructions after completing the “Programming”
portion of this text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker and easier.)
4. The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control
will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator lamp flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released (the rapid flashing lamp indicates
successful programming of the new frequency
signal). To program the remaining two buttons,
follow steps 1 through 4.
1. Locate training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit. Exact location and color of the
button may vary by garage door opener brand. If
there is difficulty locating the transmitting button,
reference to garage door opener operator’s manual.
Note:
2. Press “training” button on the garage door opener
motor head unit (which activates the “training
light”).
If, after repeated attempts, you do not successfully
program the integrated remote control device to learn
the signal of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door
opener could be equipped with the “rolling code
feature”.
Note:
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds to initiate
step 3.
Garage door opener
223
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
224
Car care
Index
Garage door opener
3. Firmly press and release the programmed
integrated remote control transmit button. Press
and release same button a second time to complete
the training process. (Some garage door openers
may required you to do this procedure a third time
to complete the training.)
Operation of remote control:
1. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
2. Select and press the appropriate button to activate
the remote control device. The integrated remote
control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
4. Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the
programmed button on the integrated remote
control transmitter.
Erasing the remote control memory:
Canadian programming:
1. Turn electronic key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
During programming, your hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the integrated remote control transmitter button
(note steps 2 through 4 in the “Programming” portion)
while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until the frequency
signal has been learned. The indicator lamp will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
2. Simultaneously holding down the left and right side
buttons for approximately 20 seconds, or until the
control lamp blink rapidly, will erase the codes of all
three channels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving instructions ......................253 Cruise control .................................264
Drive sensibly – Save Fuel ....... 253 Brake assist system (BAS) ............267
Drinking and driving ................253 Antilock brake system
Driving
Control and operation of
radio transmitters .....................226
The first 1 000 miles
(ABS) ...........................................268
Electronic stability program
(ESP) ...........................................270
What you should know
at the gas station .......................274
Check regularly and
Pedals ..........................................253
Power assistance ........................ 254
Brakes ..........................................254
Driving off ...................................255
Parking ........................................256
Tires ............................................. 257
Snow chains ............................... 259
Winter driving
(1 500 km) .................................227
Maintenance ...................................227
Tele Aid ...........................................228
Catalytic converter ........................238
Emission control ............................239
Starter switch .................................240
Starting and turning off
the engine ..................................242
Automatic transmission ...............243
Parking brake .................................252
before a long trip ...................... 276
instructions ................................ 260
Deep water ..................................262
Passenger compartment ........... 263
Traveling abroad ........................ 263
Contents - Driving
225
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
226
Car care
Index
Control and operation of radio transmitters
Control and operation of radio transmitters
COMAND, radio and telephone
Telephones and two-way radio
Warning!
Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary
Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a
built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being
connected to an external antenna) from inside the
vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could
lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic
system, possibly resulting in an accident and
personal injury.
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate
the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data
System), radio or telephone1 if road and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a
citizens band unit should only be used inside the
vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is
installed on the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions
regarding use of an external antenna.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km)
Maintenance
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the
break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance later on. Therefore, drive your vehicle
during the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) at moderate
vehicle and engine speeds.
We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle
serviced by your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the times called
for by the FSS.
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance
with the Service Booklet at the designated times/
mileage may result in vehicle damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle
driving) and excessive engine speeds.
Avoid accelerating by kickdown. It is not recommended
to brake the vehicle by manually shifting to a lower gear.
We recommend that you select positions “3”, “2” or “1”
only at moderate speeds (for hill driving).
For information on the Flexible service system (FSS),
see page 132.
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) speeds may be gradually
increased to the permissible maximum.
The first 1 000 miles
227
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
228
Car care
Index
Tele Aid
Tele Aid
Important!
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted
when using the volume control on the multifunction
steering wheel, for raising press button æ and for
lowering press button ç.
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be
performed by completing the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the “SOS” button.
Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a
system that is not activated. If the system is not
activated the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button stays
on after turning electronic key in starter switch to
position 2 and the message “TELE AID – NOT
ACTIVATED” will be shown in the multifunction display
for approx. 10 seconds.
To activate, press the “SOS” button, the Roadside
Assistance button • or the Information button ¡,
depending on the type of response required.
Shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call,
you will receive a user ID and password via first call
mail. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele
Aid” (USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock, Info Services* profile
and more.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please
call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
* Optional (available only with COMAND)
System self-check
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
Initially, after turning the electronic key in starter
switch to position 2, malfunctions are detected and
indicated (the indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not
come on). The message “TELE AID – VISIT
The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response;
automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information.
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the
vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not
damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
WORKSHOP” appears for approx. 10 seconds in the
multifunction display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important!
Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator
lamp in the “SOS” button will begin to flash. The
message “EMERGENCY CALL – CONNECTING CALL”
appears in the multifunction display. When the
connection is established, the message “EMERGENCY
CALL – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the
multifunction display. All information relevant to the
emergency, such as the location of the vehicle
(determined by the GPS satellite location system),
vehicle model, identification number and color are
generated.
Always make sure that the indicator lamps in the
“SOS” button, in the “Roadside Assistance” button and
in the “Information” button do not remain illuminated
constantly in red and the message “TELE AID – VISIT
WORKSHOP” is not displayed in the multifunction
display after the system self check.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the
system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
A voice connection between the Response Center and
the occupants of the vehicle will be established
automatically soon after the emergency call has been
initiated. When a voice connection is established the
audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID –
EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE” appears in the
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically:
• following an accident in which the Emergency
Tensioning Retractors (ETR’s) or airbags deploy,
multifunction display. The Response Center will attempt
to determine more precisely the nature of the accident
provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.
• if the antitheft alarm or the tow-away alarm stays on
for more than 20 seconds, see pages 43 and 44.
An emergency call can also be initiated manually by
opening the cover next to the inside rear view mirror
labeled “SOS”, then briefly pressing the button located
under the cover. See below for instructions on initiating
an emergency call manually.
Tele Aid
229
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
230
Car care
Index
Tele Aid
The Tele Aid system is available if:
Warning!
• it has been activated and is operational. Activation
requires a subscription for monitoring services and
cellular air time
If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button is
illuminated continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established,
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an
emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone
network is not available). The message
• the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals
are available and pass the information on to the
response center.
“EMERGENCY CALL – CALL FAILED” appears in
the multifunction display for approx. 10 seconds.
Note:
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned
by other means.
Location of the vehicle on a map is possible if the
vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite
network and pass the information on to the response
center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initiating an emergency call manually
Briefly press on cover (1) – the cover will open.
Press the SOS button (2) briefly. The indicator lamp in
the SOS button (2) will flash until the emergency call is
concluded. Wait for a voice connection to the Response
Center.
Close the cover (1) after the emergency call is
concluded.
Tele Aid
231
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
232
Car care
Index
Tele Aid
A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance
dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be
established. When a voice connection is established the
audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID –
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE” appears in the
multifunction display. The nature of the need for
assistance can then be described. The Mercedes-Benz
Roadside assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a
qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow
your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center.
For services such as labor and/or towing charges may
apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more
information.
Warning!
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in
a dangerous road location), please do not wait for
voice contact after you have pressed the emergency
button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a
safe location. The Response Center will
automatically contact local emergency officials
with the vehicle’s approximate location if they
receive an automatic “SOS” signal and cannot make
voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Roadside Assistance button •
Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside
Assistance button •. Pressing and holding the
button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to a
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher. The
button will flash while the call is in progress. The
message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING
CALL” will appear in the multifunction display. When
the connection is established, the message “ROADSIDE
ASSISTANCE – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit
data generating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to availability of
cellular and GPS signals).
These programs are only available in the USA:
• Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start,
a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire
with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable,
• Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits
the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher
to download malfunction codes and actual vehicle
data.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
Information button ¡
The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance
button • remains illuminated in red for approx.
10 seconds during the system self-check after turning
electronic key in starter switch to position 2 (together
with the “SOS” button and the Information
button ¡).
Located below the center armrest cover is the
Information button ¡. Pressing and holding the
button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to
the Customer Assistance Center. The button will flash
while the call is in progress. The message “INFO –
CONNECTING CALL” will appear in the multifunction
display. When the connection is established, the
message “INFO – CALL CONNECTED” appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit
data generating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to availability of
cellular and GPS signals).
See system self-check on page 228 when the indicator
lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than
approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance
button • is illuminated continuously and there was
no voice connection to the Response Center established,
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Roadside
Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network
is not available). The message “ROADSIDE
A voice connection between the Customer Assistance
Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established. When a voice connection is
established the audio system mutes and the message
“TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE” appears in the
multifunction display. Information regarding the
operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz
Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is
available to you.
ASSISTANCE – CALL FAILED” appears in the
multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the
ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
For more details concerning Tele Aid, please visit
www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password, sent to
you separately, to learn more (USA only).
Tele Aid
233
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
234
Car care
Index
Tele Aid
Notes:
Important!
The indicator lamp in the Information button ¡
remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds
during the system self-check after turning electronic
key in starter switch to position 2 (together with the
“SOS” button and the Roadside Assistance button •).
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after
pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in
red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a fault
or the service is not currently active, and may not
initiate a call.
Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system
checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-
9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as
soon as possible.
See system self-check on page 228 when the indicator
lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than
approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ is
illuminated continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established, then the
Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call
(e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not
available). The message “INFO – CALL FAILED” appears
in the multifunction display.
Upgrade Signals
Tele Aid system processes calls using the following
priority.
• Automatic emergency – First priority
• Manual emergency – Second priority
• Roadside assistance – Third priority
• Information – Fourth priority
Information calls can be terminated using the
ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are
connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard,
and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If certain
information such as vehicle identification number or
customer information is not available, the operator may
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
need to retransmit. During this time you will hear a
chirp and voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmission is
completed. Once a call is concluded, a chirp will be
heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will stop
flashing. The COMAND system operation will resume
(only vehicles with COMAND).
Notes:
The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until
the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a
Response Center or Customer Assistance Center
representative except Roadside Assistance and
Information calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing ì button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Important!
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the audio
system or the COMAND system audio (only vehicles
with COMAND) is muted and the selected mode (radio,
tape or CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
installed) switches off. If you must use this phone, the
vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and
place the call. The navigation system (if engaged) will
continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is
available for use and spoken commands are only
available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND
unit. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND
display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress.
If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system
does not reset, contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in
Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or
Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.
Tele Aid
235
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
236
Car care
Index
Tele Aid
Remote door unlock
Notes:
The remote door unlock feature is available if the
relevant cellular phone network is available.
In the case you have your vehicle locked unintentionally
(e.g. key inside vehicle), and no other key is available,
contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in
Canada). You will be asked to provide your password
which you provided when you completed the subscriber
agreement.
The SOS button will flash and the message
“EMERGENCY CALL – CALL CONNECTED” will appear
in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the
door unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center
specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the
vehicle occupants.
Then return to your vehicle and pull tailgate recessed
handle for minimum of 20 seconds until the “SOS”
button is flashing. The message “EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED” appears in the multifunction
display.
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for more than
20 seconds before door unlock authorization was
received by the Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pulling the tailgate recessed handle
again.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via
Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly
after the completion of your Acquaintance Call.
The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with
the remote door unlocking feature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stolen vehicle tracking services
Once information is available, the message “NEW INFO
RECEIVED - READ LATER WHEN STOPPED?” will
appear. Select “Yes”. With the vehicle stopped in a safe
location press SVC, then select “View Info Service of
mm.dd.yyyy hh.mm”. Messages will be retained for
30 minutes once the ignition is switched off.
In the event your vehicle was stolen, report the incident
to the police who will issue a numbered incident report.
Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center.
The Response Center will then attempt to covertly
contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle
is located, the Response Center will contact the local
Law Enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will
only be provided to Law Enforcement.
Important!
Tele Aid utilizes the cellular network for
communication and the GPS (Global Positioning
System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these
signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not
function and if this occurs, assistance must be
summoned by other means.
Info Services (optional-except Canada)
(only vehicles with COMAND)
Info Services categories include news, sports, stocks,
weather and calendar reminders. Choices can be
selected via www.mbusa.com or by calling 1-800-FOR-
MERcedes.
Warning!
If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button does not
illuminate during or remains illuminated after the
system self-check or if the message “TELE AID –
VISIT WORKSHOP” appears in the multifunction
display, have the system checked at the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
To request Info Services press the SVC button on the
COMAND system, then select “SEND NEW REQUEST
FOR INFO SERVICE”. “NEW INFO SERVICE REQUEST
TRANSMITTED” will appear in the COMAND display
and call status messages will appear in the
multifunction display.
Tele Aid
237
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
238
Car care
Index
Catalytic converter
Catalytic converter
Warning!
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic type
catalytic converters, an important element in
conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve
substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating
condition by following our recommended maintenance
instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet.
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate
this vehicle in areas where combustible materials
such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact
with the hot exhaust system, as these materials
could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Caution!
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only
premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should
be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned
fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to
overheat, which could start a fire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emission control
Warning!
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic
components of the exhaust gases within permissible
limits required by law.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide,
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and
lead to death.
These systems, of course, will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to factory
specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should,
therefore, be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine
adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover,
the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.
For details refer to the Service Booklet.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a
garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you
think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the
vehicle while driving, have the cause determined
and corrected immediately. If you must drive under
these conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open.
Emission control
239
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
240
Car care
Index
Starter switch
Starter switch
key or with the electronic key in starter switch
position 0 or 1 the selector lever is locked in
position “P”.
1 Most electrical consumers can be operated. For
detailed information see respective subjects.
2 Driving position.
Gear selector lever is unlocked.
To move the selector lever out of position “P” firmly
depress the service brake pedal.
3 Starting position.
See page 242 for instructions on starting and turning off
the engine.
0 The electronic key can be withdrawn in this position
only. The steering is locked when the electronic key
is removed from the starter switch. If necessary,
move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking
mechanism to engage.
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch, and lock the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
serious personal injury.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
electronic key can be removed only with the selector
lever in position “P”. After removing the electronic
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important!
Notes:
A warning sounds when the driver’s door is opened
with the electronic key is in starter switch position 1
or 0.
If the electronic key is left in the starter switch
position 0 for a extended period of time, it can no longer
be turned in the lock. In this case, remove electronic key
from starter switch and reinsert.
If the electronic key cannot be turned in the starter
switch, the vehicle battery may not be sufficiently
charged. See battery on page 330 or jump starting on
page 332.
Caution!
To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible
dead battery, always remove the electronic key from the
starter switch. Do not leave the electronic key in starter
switch position 0.
With the engine at idle speed, the charging rate of the
alternator (output) is limited.
It is therefore recommended that you turn off
unnecessary electrical consumers while driving in stop-
and-go traffic. This precaution helps to avoid draining of
the battery.
Unnecessary strain on the battery and charging system
may be minimized by turning off the following power
consumers, for example:
Heated seats, rear window defroster. In addition, the
automatic climate air volume control should be set to
the lowest position.
Starter switch
241
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
242
Car care
Index
Starting and turning off the enginge
Starting and turning off the engine
Important!
Due to the installed starter non-repeat feature, the
electronic key must be turned completely to the left
before attempting to start the engine again.
Before starting
Ensure that parking brake is engaged and that selector
lever is in position “P” or “N”. Turn electronic key in
starter switch to position 2.
In areas where temperatures frequently drop below -4°F
(-20°C) we recommend that an engine block heater be
installed. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
advise you on this subject, see page 261.
Starting
Do not depress accelerator. Briefly turn electronic key in
starter switch clockwise to the stop and release. The
starter will engage until the engine is running.
Turning off
Turn the electronic key in the starter switch to
position 0 to turn off the engine.
If engine will not run, and the starting procedure stops,
turn electronic key completely to the left and repeat
starting the engine.
The electronic key can only be removed with the
selector lever in position “P”.
After several unsuccessful attempts, have the system
checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic transmission
The automatic transmission selects individual gears
automatically, dependent upon
• Selector lever position
• Program mode selector
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted,
dependent on the driving style, the driving situation
and the road characteristics.
Important!
When parking the vehicle or before working on the
vehicle with the engine running, firmly depress the
parking brake pedal and shift the selector lever into “P”.
P27.00-2070-27
Automatic transmission
243
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
244
Car care
Index
Automatic transmission
Driving
Important!
The selector lever is automatically locked while in
position “P”. To move the selector lever out of
position “P”, the service brake pedal must be firmly
depressed before the shift lock will release.
After selecting any driving position from “N” or “P”,
wait a moment to allow the gear to fully engage before
accelerating, especially when the engine is cold.
Shift selector lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the service brake is
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive.
The vehicle may otherwise start creeping when the
selector lever is in drive or reverse position.
Accelerator position
Partial throttle = early upshifting = normal acceleration
Full throttle = later upshifting = rapid acceleration
Kickdown (depressing the accelerator beyond full
throttle) = downshifting to a lower gear = maximum
acceleration. Once the desired speed is attained, ease up
on the accelerator — the transmission shifts up again.
Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P”
or “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when your
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stopping
Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the
ABS or traction system malfunction indicator lamp to
come on. Turn off and restart the engine to clear the
malfunction indication.
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, leave the
transmission in gear and hold vehicle with the service
brake.
For longer stops with the engine idling, shift into “N”
or “P” and hold the vehicle with the service brake.
Warning!
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector lever
not fully engaged in position “P” is dangerous.
Also, when parked on an incline, position “P” alone
may not prevent your vehicle from moving,
possibly hitting people or objects.
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not
hold it with the accelerator, use the brake. This avoids
unnecessary transmission heat build up.
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting
to position “P”, see page 252 for parking brake.
Maneuvering
To maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a
parking space, control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and never
abruptly step on the accelerator.
When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel
towards the road curb.
Warning!
To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow),
alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying
slight partial throttle.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move
the selector lever from position “P”, which could
result in an accident or serious injury.
Automatic transmission
245
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
246
Car care
Index
Automatic transmission
Selector lever position
3
3
3
3
1 Program mode indicator,
3 Light emitting gear range indicators
see page 250
There is an additional indication of the current selector
lever position on the cover of the shifting-gate. The
indicators (3) come on when a switch is activated (e.g.
unlocking the vehicle or opening a door). It stays on for
approx. 15 minutes.
2 Gear range indicators
The current selector lever position is highlighted in the
gear range indicator display (2). The automatic gear
shifting process can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the selector lever.
The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to
specific operating conditions using the selector lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park position
Neutral
The park position is to be used when parking the
vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped.
The park position is not intended to serve as a
brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always use the parking brake in
addition to placing the selector lever in park to
secure the vehicle.
No power is transmitted from the engine to the
drive axle. When the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do
not engage “N” while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on
icy roads, see page 260 for winter driving
instructions).
Note:
Important!
The electronic key can only be removed from the
starter switch with the selector lever in
position “P”. With the electronic key removed, the
selector lever is locked in position “P”.
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
reason with selector lever in “N” can result in
transmission damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Reverse gear
The transmission automatically upshifts through
5th gear. Position “D” provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating
conditions.
Shift to reverse gear only with the vehicle
stopped.
Dependent on the program mode selector switch
position “S” or “W” the maximum speed in the
reverse gear is different. However, it is not
possible to change the program mode while in
reverse.
Automatic transmission
247
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
248
Car care
Index
Automatic transmission
Gear selection for special circumstances
Briefly press selector lever in the “D +” direction:
The transmission will shift from the current gear range
to the next higher gear range. If the transmission is
already in gear range “D”, an additional upshift of one
gear is possible.
The transmission gear ranges for special circumstances
can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the
right or the left with the selector lever in position “D”.
The gear range currently selected is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display.
Press and hold selector lever in the “D +” direction:
The transmission will shift from the current gear
directly to gear range “D”.
Briefly press selector lever in the “D –” direction:
The transmission will shift from the current gear range
to the next lower gear range.
Warning!
Press and hold selector lever in the “D –” direction:
The selector lever position display will switch to the
gear range currently selected by the automatic
transmission.
Shifting into another gear range that allows for quicker
acceleration or to slow the vehicle down is possible.
Downshifts can also be performed.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your
vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of
control.
Important!
With transmission in gear range “D”, “4” or “3”,
upshifting from 1st to 2nd to 3rd gear is delayed
depending on vehicle speed and engine temperature.
This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperatures.
During the brief warm-up period this delayed upshift
and increased engine noise might be perceived as a
Note:
To avoid overevving the engine when the selector lever
is moved in “D –” direction, the transmission will not
shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolutions per
minute limit would be exceeded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
malfunction. However, neither the engine nor
transmission are negatively affected by this mode of
operation.
Gear ranges:
Upshift through 4th gear only. Suitable for
performance driving.
The delayed upshift is effective with vehicle speeds
below 31 mph (50 km/h) at partial throttle and engine
temperatures below 95°F (35°C).
Upshift through 3rd gear only. Suitable for
moderately steep hills. Since the transmission
does not shift higher than 3rd gear, this gear
selection will allow use of the engine’s braking
power downhill.
To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever
is moved to a lower gear range, the transmission will not
shift to a lower gear, if the engine’s revolutions per
minute limit would be exceeded. In this case there will
be no downshift, even when the vehicle speed reaches
the engine’s rpm limit of that gear, e.g. by applying the
service brakes.
Upshift through 2nd gear only. For driving in
mountainous regions or under extreme operating
conditions. This gear selection will allow use of
the engine’s braking power when descending
steep grades.
To prevent the engine from laboring at low RPM when
driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily
loaded, the automatic transmission will downshift when
necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best
torque range.
Use this position, which makes maximum use of
the engine’s braking effect, while descending
very steep or lengthy downgrades and only at
speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h).
Note:
To avoid overevving the engine on rpm limit, the
transmission will upshift automatically to the next
higher gear as long as the vehicle is accelerating.
Automatic transmission
249
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
250
Car care
Index
Automatic transmission
Program mode selector switch
S
Standard mode
Press switch. “S” is displayed in the gear range
indicator display, see page 246. Use this mode for
all regular driving.
The vehicle starts out in 1st gear.
Accelerator Operation:
Fast on = depressing the accelerator pedal quickly
(not into kickdown position) while driving
continuously, rather than depressing the
accelerator pedal in the usual manner, will cause
the automatic transmission to shift down into a
lower gear. This gear shifting process is
dependent on the current vehicle speed.
P27.00-2072-26
Fast off = there will be no upshift when releasing
the accelerator pedal quickly, e.g. using the
engine’s braking power during performance
driving.
The transmission is provided with a selector switch (1)
for Standard “S” and Winter/Wet (snow and ice) “W”
program modes.
The program mode currently selected is indicated in the
gear range indicator display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Winter/Wet (snow and ice) mode
Emergency operation (Limp home mode)
Press switch. “W” is displayed in the gear range
indicator display, see page 246. The vehicle starts
out in 2nd gear, except with selector lever in 1st
gear, or with accelerator pedal in kick-down
position.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating
in Limp Home Mode which engages when there is a
malfunction of the transmission. This condition may be
accompanied by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster coming on.
The “W” mode helps to improve traction and
driving stability of the vehicle.
In this mode only the 2nd gear or reverse gear can be
activated.
The gear shifting process occurs at lower vehicle
and engine speeds than in the “S” program mode.
To engage 2nd gear or reverse:
Caution!
1. Stop the vehicle.
Never change the program mode when the selector lever
is out of position “P”. It could result in a change of
driving characteristics for which you may not be
prepared.
2. Move selector lever to position “P”.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
Important!
Always be certain of the program mode selected since
the vehicle driving characteristics change with the
selection of the program mode.
6. Move selector lever to position “D” (for 2nd gear), or
move selector lever to position “R” (for reverse gear).
Have the transmission checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Dependent on the program mode selector switch
position “S” or “W” and the gear selector lever in
position “R”, the ratio of power transmission changes.
Automatic transmission
251
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
252
Car care
Index
Parking brake
Parking brake
To engage, firmly depress parking brake pedal. When
the electronic key is in starter switch position 2, the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster should
come on brightly.
To release the parking brake, pull handle on instrument
panel. The brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster should go out.
A warning sounds and the parking brake warning
message appears in the multifunction display
(see page 291), if you start to drive without having
released the parking brake.
Also see brake warning lamp on page 280.
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch, and lock the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could release the parking brake, which
could result in an accident or serious injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving instructions
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Drive sensibly – Save Fuel
Drinking or taking drugs and driving can be a very
dangerous combination. Even a small amount of
alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgement.
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving
habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is
sharply increased when you drink or take drugs
and drive.
• keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures,
• remove unnecessary loads,
• remove roof rack when not in use,
• allow engine to warm up under low load use,
• avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration,
Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive after drinking or taking drugs.
Pedals
• have all maintenance work performed at regular
intervals by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold
weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly
country.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects
stored in this area may impair pedal movement.
Driving instructions
253
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
254
Car care
Index
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Excessive use of road salt and other snow melting
chemicals spread on roads during the winter months
may cause a build up of moisture or residue to form on
the braking components. This build up or residue could
cause light corrosion of the braking components if the
vehicle is parked with the brakes cold. Apply steady and
even braking pressure when stopping the vehicle to
warm up and dry the brake components.
Warning!
When the engine is not running, the brake and
steering systems are without power assistance.
Under these circumstances, a much greater effort is
necessary to stop or steer the vehicle.
Important!
Brakes
Please pay attention to the function of the brake assist
system (BAS), see page 267.
Warning!
After driving in heavy rain for some time without
applying the brakes or through water deep enough
to wet brake components or salty road conditions,
the first braking action may be somewhat reduced
and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to
obtain expected braking effect. Be sure to maintain
a safe distance from vehicles in front.
The condition of the parking brake system is checked
each time the vehicle is in the shop for the required
maintenance service.
If the parking brake is released and the brake warning
lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid
level in the reservoir is too low.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause
excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the
reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby
significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may
not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time
to avoid an accident.
Have the brake system inspected at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All checks and service work on the brake system should
be carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Caution!
When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the
load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use
the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
Warning!
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some
time, rather than immediately parking, so the air stream
will cool down the brakes faster.
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake fluid
is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be
degraded to an extent that safe braking is
substantially impaired. This could result in an
accident.
Driving off
Apply the service brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road
is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on
the engine until the operating temperature has been
reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow one
drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP
switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Driving instructions
255
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
256
Car care
Index
Driving instructions
Parking
Important!
It is advisable to set the parking brake whenever
parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move
selector lever to position “P”. When parking on hills,
always set the parking brake.
Warning!
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of
vehicle movement, before turning off the engine
and leaving the vehicle always:
1. Keep right foot on service brake pedal.
2. Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
3. Move the selector lever to position “P”.
4. Slowly release service brake pedal.
5. Turn front wheels towards the road curb.
6. Turn the electronic key to starter switch
position 0 and remove.
7. Take the electronic key and lock vehicle when
leaving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride
disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to
your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the
hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and
drive with caution to an area which is a safe
distance from the roadway.
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible
damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have
it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or
tire dealer for repairs.
Warning!
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These
indicators are located in six places on the tread
circumference and become visible at a tread depth of
approximately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the tire is
considered worn and should be replaced.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. As
tread depth approaches 1/16 in (1.5 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply
reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road surface
(conditions), the tire traction varies widely.
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across
the tread.
Driving instructions
257
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
258
Car care
Index
Driving instructions
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This
applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high
loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient
temperatures).
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is
always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the condition of
the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to
the freezing point.
Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose
control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat
tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will
cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be
substantially reduced. Under such weather
conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme
caution.
Aquaplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road,
aquaplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with
new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in
the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain.
We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires for the winter
season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced
handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can
reduce your stopping distance as compared with
summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is not snow or
ice covered.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire speed rating
Snow chains
Vehicles without Sport Package:
Your vehicle is factory equipped with “H”-rated tires,
which have a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h).
Use only snow chains that are tested and recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from
exceeding the speed rating.
Chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow
the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered
roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on
roads without snow.
Warning!
Even when permitted by law, never operate a
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed
rating of the tires.
When driving with snow chains, press the ESP control
switch to OFF, refer to page 272.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are
rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of
vehicle control and resulting in personal injury
and possible death.
Driving instructions
259
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
260
Car care
Index
Driving instructions
Winter driving instructions
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated
roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as
possible after driving is resumed while observing the
safety rules in the previous paragraph.
The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to
drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking
and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
Warning!
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move
selector lever to position “N”. Try to keep the vehicle
under control by corrective steering action.
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure
that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around the vehicle with engine running.
Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking
efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary
to produce the normal brake effect. We therefore
recommend depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads. This can
bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to
normal. A prerequisite is, however, that this be done
without endangering other drivers on the road.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a
window slightly on the side of the vehicle not
facing the wind.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter driving
Note:
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the
antilock brake system (ABS) and electronic stability
program (ESP) can only be achieved with M+S rated
radial-ply tires and/or snow chains recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Snow chains maximize performance.
Have your vehicle winterized at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before the onset of winter.
• Change the engine oil if the engine contains an oil
which is not approved for winter operation. For
viscosity (SAE/CCMC class) and filling quantity,
see page 370.
• Check engine coolant anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration.
• Additive for the windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system: Add MB Concentrate “S” to a
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze
which is formulated for below freezing
temperatures, see page 316.
• Test battery: Battery capacity drops with decreasing
ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps
to ensure that the engine can be started, even at low
ambient temperatures.
• Tires: We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on
all four wheels for the winter season. Observe
permissible maximum speed for M+S rated
radial-ply tires and the legal speed limit.
Driving instructions
261
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
262
Car care
Index
Driving instructions
Block heater (Canada only)
Deep water
The engine is equipped with a block heater.
Caution!
The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown
depth.
If you must drive through deep water, drive slowly to
prevent water from entering the engine compartment or
passenger compartment, being ingested by the air
intake, possibly causing damage to electrical
components or wiring, to engine or transmission that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger compartment
Warning!
Traveling abroad
Abroad, there is a widely-spread Mercedes-Benz service
network at your disposal. If you plan to travel into areas
which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz
Center directory, you should request pertinent
information from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Always fasten items being carried as securely as
possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in
the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
Always use partition net when transporting cargo.
Partition net cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
Driving instructions
263
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
264
Car care
Index
Driving systems
Cruise control
1 Accelerate and set:
Lift lever briefly to set speed. Hold lever up to
accelerate.
2 Decelerate and set:
Depress lever briefly to set speed.
Hold lever down to decelerate.
Normally the vehicle is accelerated to the desired
speed with the accelerator.
Speed is set by briefly pushing the lever to
position 1 or 2. The accelerator can then be
released.
The speed can be increased (e.g. for passing) by
using the accelerator. After the accelerator is
released, the previously set speed will be resumed
automatically.
The cruise control allows you to drive in a more relaxed
manner, for example over long distances, as it
automatically maintains the set speed by actively
regulating the throttle setting.
If a set speed is to be increased or decreased
slightly, e. g. to adapt to the traffic flow, hold lever in
position 1 or 2 until the desired speed is reached, or
briefly tip the lever in the appropriate direction for
increases or decreases in 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
increments. When the lever is released, the newly
set speed remains.
Any given speed above approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) can be maintained with the cruise control by
operating the lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Canceling
4 Resume
If the lever is briefly pushed to position 4 when
To cancel the cruise control, briefly push lever to
position 3.
driving at a speed exceeding approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h), the vehicle resumes the speed which
was set prior to the cancellation of the cruise
control.
When you step on the brake pedal or the vehicle
speed drops below approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h), for example when driving upgrade, the
cruise control will be canceled.
The last memorized speed is canceled when the
electronic key in the starter switch is turned to
position 1 or 0.
If the cruise control cancels by itself and remains
inoperative until the engine is restarted, have the
system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Important!
Moving gear selector lever to position “N” switches the
cruise control off.
Driving systems
265
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
266
Car care
Index
Driving systems
As soon as the grade eases, the automatic transmission
shifts up again dependent on the selector lever position.
Warning!
Only use the cruise control if the traffic and
weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a
steady speed.
Nevertheless, in some cases you may have to step on the
brake pedal to slow down. In this case the cruise control
is switched off.
• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady
speed.
Use the lever to resume the previously set speed.
• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire adhesion
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if
the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed
and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.
Notes:
If the engine does not brake the vehicle sufficiently
while driving on a downgrade, the speed you set on the
cruise control may be exceeded. In this case the
following will assist in maintaining the set cruise
controlled speed:
Downshift occurs (max. to 3rd gear) to maintain the set
cruise controlled speed by using the engine’s braking
power.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake assist system (BAS)
Warning!
Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum
BAS assistance.
To receive the benefit of the system you must apply
continuous full braking power during the stopping
sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
If the BAS warning message is displayed, a malfunction
has been detected in the system. The brake system
functions in the usual manner, but without BAS.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS is also switched
off.
If a BAS warning message is displayed, have the BAS
checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers by
having maximum power boost applied to the brakes
more quickly in emergency braking conditions than
might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s
braking style. This can help reduce braking distances
over what ordinary driving and braking style might do.
The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS).
Driving systems
267
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
268
Car care
Index
Driving systems
Antilock brake system (ABS)
At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a
slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal,
indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep
firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while
experiencing the pulsation.
Warning!
Do not pump the brake pedal, rather use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure. Pumping the brake
pedal defeats the purpose for ABS and significantly
reduces braking effectiveness.
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure results in
applying the advantages of the ABS, namely braking
power and ability to steer the vehicle.
Important!
In the case of an emergency brake maneuver keep
continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this
manner only can the ABS be most effective.
The ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during
hard braking maneuvers.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even
with light brake pedal pressure because of the
increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating
brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra
care while driving.
The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a
vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
independent of road surface conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS control
If the ABS malfunction indicator lamp stays illuminated,
have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp - in the
instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in
starter switch position 2 and should go out with the
engine running.
Warning!
ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of a ABS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on while the engine is
running, it indicates that the ABS has detected a
malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake
system functions in the usual manner, but without
antilock assistance.
For ABS malfunction indicator lamp, see page 283.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on
with the engine running.
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the
ABS is operational.
Note:
To alert following vehicles to slippery road conditions
you discover, operate your hazard warning flashers as
appropriate.
Driving systems
269
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
270
Car care
Index
Driving systems
Electronic stability program (ESP)
Important!
If the ESP warning lamp v flashes:
Warning!
• During take-off apply as little throttle as possible.
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, or aquaplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• While driving ease up on the accelerator.
• Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
• Do not switch off the ESP.
Caution!
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (see
page 335, “Towing the vehicle”), the engine must be
shut off (electronic key in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and
will apply the rear wheel brakes.
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces
driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving
conditions.
Over/understeering of the vehicle is counteracted by
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel to create a
countervailing vehicle movement. Engine torque is also
limited. The ESP warning lamp, located in the
speedometer dial, starts to flash when ESP is in
operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
When testing the parking brake on a brake test
dynamometer, the engine must be shut off. Otherwise,
the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the
rear wheel brakes.
The yellow ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer
dial comes on with the electronic key in starter switch
position 2. It should go out with the engine running.
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the
ESP is only achieved with Mercedes-Benz recommended
M+S rated radial-ply tires and/or snow chains.
If the ESP warning message is displayed, a malfunction
has been detected in the system. Only partial engine
output will be available.
Have the ESP checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Synchronizing ESP
If the power supply was interrupted (battery
disconnected or empty), the ESP warning message may
be displayed with the engine running.
For ESP warning message, see page 284.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the ESP is also switched
off.
Turn steering wheel completely to the left and then to
the right. The ESP warning message should go out.
Driving the vehicle with varied size tires will cause the
wheels to rotate at different speeds, therefore the ESP
may activate (yellow ESP warning lamp in speedometer
dial comes on). For this reason, all wheels, including the
spare wheel, must have the same tire size.
Driving systems
271
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
272
Car care
Index
Driving systems
ESP control switch
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,
switch off ESP by pressing the upper half (1) of the ESP
switch. The ESP warning lamp v located in the
speedometer dial, is continuously illuminated.
Warning!
When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated
continuously, the ESP is switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque
reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.
P42.45-2278-26
ESP control switch located on center console.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
1 Press to switch ESP off
ESP warning lamp v in located in speedometer
dial comes on.
A portion of the ESP system remains active, even with
the switch in the OFF position.
If one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin, the
brake is applied until the wheel regains sufficient
traction. The traction control engages at vehicle speeds
up to approximately 24 mph (40 km/h), and switches
off at 50 mph (80 km/h).
2 Press to switch ESP on
ESP warning lamp v in located in speedometer
dial goes out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
Important!
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may cause
serious damage to the drive train which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If the ESP warning lamp flashes:
• During take-off, apply as little throttle as possible.
• While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
The ESP warning lamp, located in the speedometer dial,
starts to flash at any vehicle speed as soon as the tires
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
ESP: press lower half (2) of the switch (the ESP warning
lamp in the speedometer dial goes out).
Warning!
ESP should not be switched off during normal
driving other than in circumstances described
above. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle
stability in standard driving maneuvers.
Driving systems
273
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
274
Car care
Index
What you should know at the gas station
What you should know at the gas station
Fuel supply
Open flap by pushing near front (arrow). Turn fuel cap
to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure in
tank has been released, then remove cap. Failure to
remove slowly could result in personal injury.
See page 349 for manual release of fuel filler flap.
Fuel
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully
insert filler nozzle unit.
Only fill fuel tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out
– do not top up or overfill.
Warning!
Overfilling of fuel tank may result in creating
pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge such as the gas spraying back out upon
removing the filler nozzle which could cause
personal injury.
Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It
burns violently and can cause serious injury.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling
fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking
materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking
materials near gasoline!
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can
cause the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate, see
page 278 for notes on the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel tank capacity approximately 16.4 US gal (62.0 l).
This includes approximately 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) reserve.
Spark plugs
Approved spark plugs, refer to “Technical Data”.
Use premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane Index 91 (Average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Air conditioner
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant, refer to
“Technical Data”.
Engine oil
Checking oil level, see instructions on page 135 and 314.
Bulbs
Recommended engine oils, see Approved Service
Products sheet.
High and low beams: H7 (55 W),
low beam: Xenon (optional)
fog lamps: H B4 (55 W),
turn signal lamps,
Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water
quality). For further information refer to page 315.
front: 1156 NA (26.9/5 W/32/4 cp),
parking and standing lamps, front: W 5W (5 W)
side marker lamps, front: 5 W/4 cp,
turn signal lamps, rear: PY 21 W bulb (yellow),
stop lamps: P 21 W/32 cp bulb,
rear fog lamp (driver’s side)/tail, parking, standing and
side marker lamp: P 21/4 W
Tire pressure
For tire pressure, refer to tire pressure label inside the
fuel filler flap. See page 329 for further details.
backup lamps: P 21 W/32 cp,
license plate lamps: 5 W/4 cp
What you should know at the gas station
275
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlogad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
276
Car care
Index
Check regularly and before a long trip
Check regularly and before a long trip
Vehiclelighting: Check function and cleanliness. For
replacement of light bulbs, see “Exterior lamps” on
page 339.
Exterior lamp switch, see page 137.
3
2
P00.40-2005-26
1 Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning system
For refilling reservoir see page 316.
2 Coolant level,
see “Coolant level” on page 315
3 Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed),
see “Brake fluid” on page 370.
Opening hood, see page 311.
Removing fuse box cover, see page 309.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Malfunction and indicator
COOLANT
Instrument cluster display
lamp in the center console ...... 284
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp ....284
Malfunction and warning
(coolant temperature) ................294
ENGINE OIL LEVEL ...................295
STEERING GEAR OIL .................296
Malfunction and indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster .............278
On-board diagnostic system .........278
Check engine malfunction
indicator lamp .............................278
Brake warning lamp ..................280
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) indicator lamp ..................281
Fuel reserve warning .................282
ABS malfunction
messages in the
LIGHTING SYSTEM ....................297
LAMP SENSOR ...........................299
DOOR ...........................................299
TRUNK OPEN .............................300
HOOD ...........................................300
TELEPHONE – FUNCTION .......301
TELE AID .....................................301
WASHER FLUID .........................302
RESTRAINT SYSTEM .................303
KEY ...............................................303
FUEL RESERVE ..........................304
UNDERVOLTAGE ........................304
multifunction display .............. 285
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE ................287
BATTERY / ALTERNATOR ....... 288
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ....289
BRAKE ASSIST ...........................289
BRAKE PAD WEAR .................... 290
BRAKE FLUID ............................290
PARKING BRAKE ....................... 291
SEAT BELT SYSTEM .................. 291
ELEC. STABIL. PROG.
indicator lamp .............................283
Electronic stability program
(ESP) — warning lamp ...............284
Seat belt nonusage
(Electronic stability program) . 292
COOLANT
warning lamp .............................284
(coolant level) .............................293
Contents - Instrument cluster display
Instruments
277
Instrument
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
and controls
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
278
Car care
Index
Malfunction and indicator lamps
Malfunction and indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster
Warning!
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide,
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and
lead to death.
General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up
during the bulb self-check when turning the electronic
key in starter switch to position 2, have it checked and
replaced if necessary.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a
garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you
think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the
vehicle while driving, have the cause determined
and corrected immediately. If you must drive under
these conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic
components of the exhaust gases within permissible
limits required by law.
On-board diagnostic system
These systems, of course, will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to factory
Check engine malfunction indicator lamp
specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should,
therefore, be carried out only by authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center qualified technicians. Engine
adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover,
the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.
For details refer to the Service Booklet.
Engine malfunction indicator lamp. If the
“CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator
lamp comes on when the engine is running,
it indicates a malfunction of the fuel management
system, emission control system, systems which impact
emissions, or the fuel cap is not closed tight (check the
fuel cap). If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp is illuminated
continuously and the vehicle is driving normally, you
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
may still drive the vehicle, however, in all cases, we
recommend that you have the system checked at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp
comes on, have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp comes on continuosly
and/or the vehicle is not driving normally (e.g.
malfunction of the fuel management system or running
out of fuel), serious damage can occur to the emission
system. Please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately.
With some exceptions, the control module switches off
the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp if the
condition, causing the lamp to come on, no longer exists
during three consecutive cycles.
An on-board diagnostic connector is located in the
passenger compartment near to the parking brake
pedal, allowing the accurate identification of system
malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes.
The Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI) control
module monitors emission control components that
either provide input signals to or receive output signals
from the control module. Malfunctions resulting from
interruptions or failure of any of these components are
indicated by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster and are
simultaneously stored in the SFI control module.
Malfunction and indicator lamps
279
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
280
Car care
Index
Malfunction and indicator lamps
Brake warning lamp
Warning!
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated
can result in an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately if the brake warning lamp
stays on. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
Except Canada
Canada only
When the brake warning lamp and message appear
while the engine is running, this means:
• there is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir
Note:
(engine running and parking brake released), or
If you find that the minimum mark on the brake fluid
reservoir is reached, have the brake system checked for
brake pad thickness and leaks.
• the parking brake is set (engine running).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp
After the lamp goes out, the system continues to
monitor the components and circuitry of the airbag
system and will indicate a malfunction by coming on
again.
When turning the electronic key in starter
switch to position 1 the indicator lamp “SRS”
in the instrument cluster comes on. If no
fault is detected, the lamp will go out after
approximately 4 seconds.
Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the
system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be
activated when needed in an accident, which could
result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also
result in injury.
When turning the electronic key in starter switch to
position 2 the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument
cluster comes on. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go
out when the engine is running.
The operational readiness of the airbag system is
verified by the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument
cluster when turning the electronic key in starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
See page 67 for notes on airbags, see page 65 for belt
tensioners and page 56 for infant and child seat
restraint.
Malfunction and indicator lamps
281
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
282
Car care
Index
Malfunction and indicator lamps
Fuel reserve warning
After refueling the vehicle, the message
“1 MALFUNCTION” appears in the multifunction
display when turning the electronic key in starter
switch to position 2. This malfunction message has to be
cleared, see page 113 for notes on the malfunction/
warning message memory.
P54.30-3609-26
1 Fuel reserve indicator
When the warning lamp (1) comes on after starting the
engine, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates that
the fuel level is down to the reserve quantity of
approximately 2.1 US gal (8 liters). In addition to the
warning lamp, the message “RESERVE FUEL” –
“VISIT FUEL STATION” appears in the multifunction
display.
See page 274 for notes on refueling the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS malfunction indicator lamp
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also
switched off. The malfunction indicator lamps and
malfunction messages in the multifunction display
come on with the engine running.
ABS
instrument cluster comes on with the
electronic key in starter switch position 2
and should go out with the engine running.
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the
ABS is operational.
When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp symbol and
warning in the instrument cluster remains illuminated
while the engine is running, it indicates that the ABS
has detected a malfunction and has switched off. In this
case, the brake system functions in the usual manner,
but without antilock assistance.
Have the system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
A malfunctioning ABS control unit can possibly affect
the operation of other systems (e.g. Navigation,
Automatic transmission). Be guided accordingly with
respect to the use of those systems and have the system
checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
See page 268 for notes on antilock brake system (ABS).
Malfunction and indicator lamps
283
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
284
Car care
Index
Malfunction and indicator lamps
Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp
Malfunction and indicator lamp in the center
console
The yellow ESP warning lamp in the
speedometer dial comes on with the
electronic key in starter switch position 2.
It should go out with engine running.
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
The ü indicator lamp will light up for approximately
6 seconds when you turn the electronic key in starter
switch to position 1 or 2.
If the ESP malfunction indicator lamp remains
illuminated with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the system. Pressing the accelerator
pedal will require greater effort. Only partial engine
output will be available.
It does not light up if there is a fault in the system.
The ü indicator lamp stays lit as long as a
Baby SmartTM child seat is properly installed on the
front passenger seat. It indicates that the front
passenger airbag is switched off.
See page 64 for BabySmartTM airbag and its deactivation
system.
See electronic stability program (ESP) on page 270 if the
warning lamp lights up or flashes when the vehicle is
moving.
Seat belt nonusage warning lamp
With the electronic key in starter switch
position 2, the seat belt nonusage warning
lamp comes on, and a warning sounds for a
short time if the drivers seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the engine, the seat belt nonusage
warning lamp blinks for a brief period to remind the
driver and passengers to fasten seat belts.
Baby SmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Malfunction and warning messages in the
multifunction display
Warning!
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will
ONLY work with a special child seat designed to
operate with it. It will not work with child seats
which are not BabySmartTM compatible.
Malfunction and warning messages for the following
systems will be displayed immediately in the
multifunction display.
They are divided into three categories.
Never place anything between seat cushion and
child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the
effectiveness of the deactivation system.
Category C1:
Messages of most immediate priority.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
These cannot be cleared from the instrument cluster
using the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see
page 94).
The passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
the ü indicator lamp remains illuminated.
Categories C2 and C3:
Please be sure to check the indicator every time
you use the special system child seat. Should the
light go out while the restraint is installed, please
check installation. If the light remains out, do not
use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
Messages of less immediate priority.
These can be cleared from the instrument cluster using
the reset knob on the instrument cluster (see page 94)
and are then stored in the malfunction message
memory. See page 113.
Malfunction and warning messages
285
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
286
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
Note:
Warning!
Certain malfunction and warning messages are
accompanied by an audible signal.
Malfunction and warning messages in red are always
accompanied by an audible signal.
All categories of messages contain important
information which should be taken note of and,
where malfunction indicated, addressed as soon as
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty, or result in property damage or personal
injury.
Temporary messages such as “HOOD OPEN!” will not be
stored in the malfunction message memory.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (engine control unit)
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE (several systems)
Line 1
Line 2
C*
Line 1
Line 2
C*
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY FAULTY
2
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY FAULTY
2
*
C = Category, see page 285
*
C = Category, see page 285
This message is displayed to indicate that the
The displays for several systems have failed. Some
systems themselves may also have failed.
information being relayed by the engine control unit is
no longer complete. The display for coolant temperature
gauge, tachometer, or the cruise control may have failed.
Malfunction and warning messages
287
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
288
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
BATTERY /ALTERNATOR
This message indicates a malfunction which must be
repaired immediately.
It may indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should
this condition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced
before continuing to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine.
Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message
displayed.
Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Line 1
Line 2
VISIT WORKSHOP!
C*
BATTERY/ALTERNATOR
2
*
C = Category, see page 285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE ASSIST
Line 1
Line 2
C*
2
Line 1
Line 2
C*
2
ABS SYSTEM
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
VISIT WORKSHOP!1
BRAKE ASSIST
BRAKE ASSIST
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
NOT AVAILABLE!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
2
2
2
*
C = Category, see page 285
*
C = Category, see page 285
See page 268 for notes on the antilock brake system
(ABS).
A malfunction has been detected in the system. The
brake system functions in the usual manner, but
without brake assist system (BAS).
1
The display or the system is malfunctioning
See page 267 for notes on the brake assist system (BAS).
Malfunction and warning messages
289
Instruments
Operation
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
and controls
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
290
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
BRAKE PAD WEAR
BRAKE FLUID
Line 1
Line 2
C*
Line 1
Line 2
VISIT WORKSHOP!
C*
BRAKE PAD WEAR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
2
BRAKE FLUID
2
*
C = Category, see page 285
*
C = Category, see page 285
When this message appears during braking, it indicates
that the brake pads are worn down.
Warning!
Driving with this message displayed can result in
an accident. Have your brake system checked
immediately. Don’t add brake fluid before checking
the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid
reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
Have the brake system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING BRAKE
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
Line 1
Line 2
C*
1
Line 1
Line 2
C*
1
PARKING BRAKE
PARKING BRAKE
ENGAGE BRAKE!
RELEASE BRAKE!
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
PASSENGER SEAT BELT
DRIVER SEAT BELT
VISIT WORKSHOP!
FASTEN SEAT BELT!
FASTEN SEAT BELT!
1
2
2
*
C = Category, see page 285
*
C = Category, see page 285
Malfunction and warning messages
291
Instruments
Operation
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
and controls
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
292
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
ELEC. STABIL. PROG. (Electronic stability program)
1
The enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and the torque
reduction feature are unavailable.
2
This message may be displayed if the power supply was
interrupted (battery disconnected or empty). Synchronize ESP, see
page 271
3
The system is temporarily unavailable. The reason could be that
the self-diagnosis has not been completed. The display will clear
itself after driving a short distance at more than 12 mph
(2o km/h).
4
5
The system is unavailable due to low voltage, e.g. battery not being
charged.
Line 1
Line 2
C*
2
A malfunction has been detected in the system. In case of ESP
malfunction the ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster
illuminates and the ESP switch in the center console does not
function. If in addition the ABS is malfunctioning, only partial
engine output will be available.
ELEC. STABIL. PROG.
ELEC. STABIL. PROG.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
NOT AVAILABLE!1, 2, 3, 4
VISIT WORKSHOP!1, 5
VISIT WORKSHOP!6
2
2
6
The display or the system is malfunctioning.
*
C = Category, see page 285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COOLANT (coolant level)
The low engine coolant level warning should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
In cases of major or frequent minor coolant loss, have
the cooling system checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Note:
Do not drive without coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing major engine damage.
Line 1
Line 2
C*
Monitor the coolant temperature gauge while driving,
see page 131.
COOLANT
CHECK LEVEL!
2
See page 316 for instructions on topping up the coolant.
*
C = Category, see page 285
When this message appears while driving, the coolant
level has dropped below the required level. If no leaks
are noticeable and the engine temperature does not
increase, continue to drive to the nearest service station
and have coolant added to the coolant system.
Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may
burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
You can be seriously burned.
Malfunction and warning messages
293
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
294
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
COOLANT (coolant temperature)
During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 120°C.
The engine should not be operated with the coolant
temperature above 120°C. Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be
seriously burned.
Line 1
Line 2
C*
COOLANT
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!1
VISIT WORKSHOP!2
1
2
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious
burns and can occur just by opening the engine
hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it.
*
C = Category, see page 285
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do
not stand near the vehicle until it cools down.
1
This may indicate that the poly-V-belt has broken. Should this
condition occur, the poly-V-belt must be replaced before continuing
to operate the vehicle. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to
an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the
engine. Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message
displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
2
The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty. Observe the coolant
temperature gauge. See page 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter. The
engine oil level must be checked immediately. See Engine oil level
indicator on page 135.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level.
Check the engine oil level immediately. See Engine oil level
indicator on page 135 and check the engine for visible leakage
(loss of oil).
It may be that there is water in the engine oil. Have the engine oil
checked.
5
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
When the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – CHECK LEVEL!”
message appears while the engine is running and at
operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped
to approximately the minimum mark on the dipstick.
Line 1
Line 2
C*
2
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
ENGINE OIL
CHECK LEVEL!1
STOP, ENGINE OFF!2
REDUCE OIL LEVEL13
VISIT WORKSHOP!4
VISIT WORKSHOP!5
1
When this occurs, the warning will first come on
intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops
further.
2
2
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest
service station where the engine oil should be topped to
the “full” mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
2
*
1
C = Category, see page 285.
The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored.
Extended driving with the symbol displayed could
result in serious engine damage that is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The engine oil level must be checked immediately. See Engine oil
level indicator on page 135.
2
There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.
Malfunction and warning messages
295
Instruments
Operation
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Index
and controls
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
296
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
STEERING GEAR OIL
Warning!
If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is too
low, the steering power assistance could fail. Much
greater effort will then be needed to turn the
steering wheel.
Do not add steering oil without checking the
steering system.
Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system checked
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
P54.30-4682-21
Line 1
Line 2
STEERING GEAR OIL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
System without or with insufficient steering gear oil
level. Danger of damage to steering gear exists.
When this message appears, the steering gear oil level
has dropped below the required level. Have the system
checked by the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Line 1
Line 2
C*
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
TURN SIGNAL F, R
BRAKE LIGHT2
CHECK LAMPS!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
SWITCH OFF LIGHTS!
REMOVE KEY!
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
BRAKE LIGHT, L3
BRAKE LIGHT, R3
3RD STOP LAMP3
HIGH BEAM, L
Line 1
Line 2
C*
2
HIGH BEAM, R
LICENSE PLATE L, L
LICENSE PLATE L, R
LIGHTS
LOW BEAM,L
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
VISIT WORKSHOP!1
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
CHECK LAMPS!
LOW BEAM,R
2
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
TURN SIGNAL, L
TURN SIGNAL, R
L. TURN SIG. RFLECTR
R. TURN SIG. RFLECTR
TURN SIGNAL F, L
2
2
AUTOM. LIGHT ON
FRONT FOGLAMP, L
FRONT FOGLAMP, R
REAR FOGLAMP
2
2
2
2
Malfunction and warning messages
297
Instruments
Operation
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
and controls
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
298
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
In the case of bulb failures in certain lamps, other lamps
will substitute. See page 339 for instructions on
replacing bulbs.
Line 1
Line 2
C*
REAR FOGLAMP
SWITCH OFF
2
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4
*
1
2
C = Category, see page 285
REVERSE LIGHT, L
REVERSE LIGHT, R
TAIL LIGHT, L
CHECK LAMPS!
2
2
2
The display or the system is malfunctioning.
CHECK LAMPS!
The brake lamps are switching on after a delay or are permanently
on – visit workshop immediately.
CHECK LAMPS!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4
3
4
The brake lamp comprises several light emitting diodes. The
warning message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
TAIL LIGHT, R
SIDELIGHT, L
SIDELIGHT, R
CHECK LAMPS!
2
2
2
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4
Other bulbs will be brought into use as replacements when certain
lamps blow.
CHECK LAMPS!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4
CHECK LAMPS!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LAMP SENSOR
DOOR
Line 1
Line 2
C*
Line 1
Line 2
C*
LAMP SENSOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
2
DOOR OPEN!
1
*
C = Category, see page 285
*
C = Category, see page 285.
The headlamps will be switched on automatically if the
light sensor malfunctions.
The individual setting menu “LIGHTING”,
“LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE” can be set to
“MANUAL”. See page 122. It will then be possible to
switch the headlamps on and off using the exterior lamp
switch. See page 137 for notes on the exterior lamp
switch.
Malfunction and warning messages
299
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
300
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
TRUNK OPEN
HOOD
Line 1
Line 2
C*
Line 1
Line 2
C*
TRUNK OPEN!
2
HOOD OPEN!
2
*
C = Category, see page 285
*
C = Category, see page 285.
See page 311 for hood.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEPHONE – FUNCTION
TELE AID
Line 1
Line 2
NOT AVAILABLE!
C*
Line 1
Line 2
C*
FUNCTION
3
TELE AID
VISIT WORKSHOP!1
1
*
C = Category, see page 285.
*
1
C = Category, see page 285.
The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response; automatic
and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. With
this message displayed, one or more functions may not be
available.
The display appears if button í or ì on the
multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle
is not equipped with a telephone.
See page 228 for notes on the Tele Aid.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the
system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Malfunction and warning messages
301
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
302
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
WASHER FLUID
When this message appears while the engine is
running, the level of the reservoir has dropped to
approximately 1/3 of the total volume. The reservoir
should be refilled with the prescribed mixture of MB
Windshield washer concentrate and water or the
concentrate and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on
ambient temperature, at the next opportunity. The
reservoir for the windshield and headlamp washer
systems is located in the engine compartment.
See windshield and headlamp washer system on
page 316 for instructions on topping up the washer
fluid.
Line 1
Line 2
C*
WASHER FLUID
CHECK LEVEL!
3
*
C = Category, see page 285.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
KEY
Line 1
Line 2
C*
Line 1
Line 2
C*
2
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!
1
REPLACE KEY1
AUTOM. LIGHT ON
VISIT WORKSHOP!
REMOVE KEY!
1
*
C = Category, see page 285.
*
1
C = Category, see page 285.
Key needs possibly to be replaced.
See page 56 for notes on the seat belts, and page 67 for
notes on the airbags.
Malfunction and warning messages
303
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
304
Car care
Index
Malfunction and warning messages
FUEL RESERVE
UNDERVOLTAGE
Line 1
Line 2
C*
Line 1
Line 2
ENGINE ON!
CONSUMER DEFECTIVE!
C*
1
RESERVE FUEL
VISIT FILLING STATION!
2
UNDERVOLTAGE
UNDERVOLTAGE
1
*
C = Category, see page 285.
*
C = Category, see page 285.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare wheel,
storage compartment ................318
Vehicle tools ....................................319
Towing the vehicle .........................335
Transmission selector lever,
manually unlocking ...................338
Practical hints
First aid kit .....................................306
Stowing things in the vehicle ......307
Fuses ................................................307
Hood ................................................. 311
Adding engine oil .......................... 314
Automatic transmission
fluid level ................................... 315
Coolant level ................................... 315
Adding coolant ........................... 316
Windshield and headlamp
Vehicle jack ....................................320 Exterior lamps ................................339
Wheels ............................................ 321 Replacing bulbs ..........................339
Tire replacement ....................... 321 Standby bulb function ...................345
Rotating wheels ......................... 322 Changing batteries in the
Spare wheel ....................................323
Spare wheel bolts ......................323
Changing wheels ...........................324
Tire inflation pressure ................. 329
Battery ............................................. 330
Jump starting ................................. 332
electronic main key ..................346
Synchronizing
remote control ............................348
Emergency engine shut-down .....348
Fuel filler flap, manual release ...349
Replacing wiper blade insert .......351
Roof rack .........................................352
washer system ........................... 316
Contents - Practical hints
305
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
306
Car care
Index
First aid kit
First aid kit
The first aid kit is stored in the cargo area behind the
left hand trim panel (2).
Remove first aid kit (3).
Note:
To open trim panel:
Check contents of first aid kit for completeness on a
regular basis.
Press button (1) and fold down the panel (2).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stowing things in the vehicle
Warning!
Fuses
Most of your vehicle’s electrical components are fused
with safety fuses. With the exception of the brake lights,
all individual lighting system components are
electronically fused. Before replacing a blown safety
fuse, determine the cause of the short circuit. Always
observe amperage and color of fuse.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or
sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing
things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than
the seat backs.
The circuit for components is protected by a cycled
circuit breaker interrupted if too much current is being
drawn. The circuit closes automatically after a short
time; the circuit is broken again if the malfunction
reoccurs.
Always use partition net when transporting cargo.
Partition net cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
Always use a new fuse for replacement. Never attempt to
repair or bridge a blown fuse.
A fuse chart is located in fuse box (1).
Spare fuses and a special fuse puller are stored with the
tool kit, see page 319.
Fuses
307
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
308
Car care
Index
Fuses
Fuse box in the passenger compartment
To gain access to fuse box, pull cover away from fuse
box (arrow) and remove rearward.
1 Fuse box in passenger compartment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuse box in engine compartment
2 Cover
5 Fuse box in engine compartment, left-hand side
3 Screw
4 Retainer
6 Clamps
To gain access to fuse box:
Release clamps (6) and remove the cover.
To remove cover:
Twist screws (3) 90˚ counterclockwise. Pull up cover (2)
and slide out retainer (4) and remove it by pulling cover
towards front. Install in reverse order.
To close the fuse box:
Ensure that the sealing rubber is properly positioned
when you replace the cover. Press the cover down by
hand and secure with clamps (6).
Fuses
309
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
310
Car care
Index
Fuses
Auxiliary fuse box in the trunk
1 Button for unlocking the trim panel
3 Auxiliary fuse box
4 Special fuse puller
5 Spare fuses
2 Trim panel
The auxiliary fuse box is located in the cargo area
behind the left hand trim panel (2).
To open trim panel:
Press button (1) and fold down the panel (2).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is
dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils,
spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the
ignition system
Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the engine
is running. Be sure the hood is properly closed
before driving. When closing hood, use extreme
caution not to catch hands or fingers.
• with the engine running,
• while starting the engine,
• if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned
manually.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the
engine has been turned off. Stay clear from fan
blades.
If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine
compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge
indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open
the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open
the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call a fire department.
Engine compartment
311
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
312
Car care
Index
Engine compartment
To open:
Pull handle (2) to its stop out of radiator grill and open
hood (do not pull up on the handle).
To unlock the hood, pull release lever (1) under the
driver´s side of the instrument panel. At the same time
a handle will extend out of the radiator grill.
Note:
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, open
the hood only with the wipers in the parked position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To close:
Lower the hood and let it drop into lock from a height of
approximately 1 ft. (30 cm), assisting with hands placed
flat on edges of hood (3).
To avoid hood damage, please make sure that hood is
fully closed. If not, repeat closing procedure. Do not
push down on hood to attempt to fully close it.
Engine compartment
Instruments
313
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
and controls
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
314
Car care
Index
Engine compartment
Adding engine oil
Unscrew the oil filler cap and add oil carefully if you
need to top up the oil. Follow the message appearing on
the engine oil level indicator display (page 135) as to
quantity to be added. Re-install oil filler cap.
Do not overfill the engine. Excessive oil must be drained
or siphoned. It could cause damage to engine and
catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
1
See malfunction and warning messages on page 285 if
an engine oil level display appears on the multifunction
indicator when the engine is running.
2
Notes:
P01.00-2219-26
See page 135 for engine oil level indicator display.
1 Oil filler cap
The dipstick tube allows for draining of oil by using a
suction device.
2 Plug of dipstick guide tube
The engine oil level can only be checked via the
multifunction display in the instrument cluster.
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level
ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.
Check engine oil level approximately 5 minutes after
stopping the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the
oil pan.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic transmission fluid level
Coolant level
The transmission has a permanent fill of automatic
transmission fluid.
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and
changes are not required. For this reason the dipstick is
omitted.
If you notice fluid leaks or gear shifting malfunctions,
have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
transmission fluid level.
P20.30-2133-26
1 Coolant expansion tank
To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked
on level ground and the engine stopped.
Check coolant level only when coolant is cold.
The coolant level should reach the black top part of the
reservoir.
See page 372 for antifreeze/anticorrosion mixture.
Engine compartment
315
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
316
Car care
Index
Engine compartment
Adding coolant
Windshield and headlamp washer system
If coolant has to be added, a 50/50 mixture of water and
MB anticorrosion/antifreeze should be added.
Warning!
• In order to avoid possibly serious burns:
Use extreme caution when opening the hood if
there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking
from the cooling system, or if the coolant
temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is
overheated.
• Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above 194°F
(90°C). Allow engine to cool down before
removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains
hot fluid and is under pressure.
1 Windshield and headlamp washer fluid reservoir
The reservoir should be refilled with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate
commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
• Using a rag, slowly open cap approximately
1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened
immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will
be blown out under pressure.
• Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may
burn if it comes into contact with hot engine
parts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles without headlamp cleaning system:
Capacity approximately 3.2 US qt (3.0 l)
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing:
Vehicles with headlamp cleaning system:
Capacity approximately 6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water.
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water).
Warning!
For temperatures below freezing:
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do
not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine
parts, because it may burn. You can be seriously
burned.
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze.
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent).
Engine compartment
317
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
318
Car care
Index
Spare wheel
Spare wheel, storage compartment
Open storage compartment under trunk floor, see
page 209.
To remove the spare wheel:
Turn the luggage bowl counterclockwise and remove the
spare wheel.
To store spare wheel:
Place spare wheel in wheel well and secure it with
luggage bowl. Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop.
1 Spare wheel
2 Storage tray
The spare wheel is located under the trunk floor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicletools
The vehicle tools are stored in the cargo area behind the
left hand trim panel (2).
3 Vehicle tool kit, towing eye bolt, wheel bolts and
jack, special fuse puller, spare fuses (3)
To open trim panel:
Press button (1) and fold down the panel (2).
Vehicle tools
319
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
320
Car care
Index
Jack
Vehiclejack
To prepare the jack for use:
Storing the jack in the cargo area:
Remove the jack from its compartment in cargo area.
Before storing the jack, it should be fully collapsed, with
handle folded in (storage position).
Push the crank handle up and turn clockwise until it
engages (operational position).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheels
Warning!
Replace rims or tires with the same designation,
manufacturer and type as shown on the original part.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the
vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into either
side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury,
use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away
from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels before
raising vehicle with jack.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information on tested and recommended rims and tires
for summer and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is
raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical
when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use
the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm
is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always
lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity
Tire replacement
Front and rear tires should be replaced in sets. Rims
and tires must be of the correct size and type. For
dimensions, see “Technical Data”.
jackstands before working under the vehicle.
We recommend that you break in new tires for
approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speed.
Tires, Wheels
321
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
322
Car care
Index
Tires, Wheels
It is imperative that the wheel mounting bolts be
fastened to a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm)
whenever wheels are mounted.
Rotating wheels
The wheels can be rotated according to the degree of
tire wear while retaining the same direction of travel.
For rim and tire specifications, refer to “Technical Data”.
Rotating, however, should be carried out as
recommended by the tire manufacturer, before the
characteristic tire wear pattern (shoulder wear on front
wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels) becomes
visible, as otherwise the driving properties deteriorate.
Warning!
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread
is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained
damage, replace them.
Notes:
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in
the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels any time
you rotate the wheels or wash the vehicle underside.
The use of retread tires is not recommended. Retread
tires may adversely affect the handling characteristics
and safety of the vehicle.
Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads. For this reason, check rims for
damage at regular intervals. The rim flanges must be
checked for wear before a tire is mounted. Remove
burrs, if any.
Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure after
rotating the wheels. For tire inflation pressure see
inside of fuel filler flap and also page 274.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare wheel
Important!
The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full size tire of
the same type as on the vehicle, and is fully functional.
For additional information, refer to page 366.
Spare wheel bolts
Warning!
Be sure to use the original length wheel bolts when
remounting the original wheel after it has been
repaired.
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2 Wheel bolt for steel rims
Note:
Wheel bolts (2) must be used when mounting steel
wheel rim.
Tires, Wheels
323
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
324
Car care
Index
Tires, Wheels
Changing wheels
Move vehicle to a level area which is a safe distance
from the roadway.
Warning!
1. Set parking brake and turn on hazard warning
flasher.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the
vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into either
side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury,
use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away
from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels before
raising vehicle with jack.
2. Move selector lever to position “P” and turn off
engine.
3. Prevent vehicle from rolling away by blocking
wheels with wheel chocks (not supplied with
vehicle) or sizable wood block or stone. When
changing a wheel on a hill, place chocks on the
downhill side blocking both wheels of the other
axle. On an level road, place one chock in front of
and one behind the wheel that is diagonally
opposite to the wheel being changed.
Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is
raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical
when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use
the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm
is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always
lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity
jackstands before working under the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P40.10-2427-26
4. Remove the two-piece wheel wrench from the
6. Place jack on firm ground. Position jack (1) under
the take-up bracket (2) so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side, even if the
vehicle is parked on an incline.
vehicle tool kit and assemble (see page 320).
5. Using the wrench, loosen but do not yet remove the
wheel bolts.
The jack take-up brackets are located directly
behind the front wheel housings and in front of the
rear wheel housings.
7. Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is clear of the
ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.
Tires, Wheels
325
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
326
Car care
Index
Tires, Wheels
P40.10-2428-26
8. Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and install
alignment bolt (1) supplied in the tool kit. Remove
the remaining bolts. Keep bolt threads protected
from dirt and sand.
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2 Wheel bolt for steel rims
9. Remove wheel. Grip wheel from the sides. Keep
hands from beneath the wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P40.10-2429-26
P40.10-2430-26
10. Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.
11. Lower vehicle and remove jack.
Install wheel on wheel hub. Insert wheel bolts and
tighten them slightly.
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub
and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.
Unscrew the alignment bolt to install the last wheel
bolt.
Tires, Wheels
327
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
328
Car care
Index
Tires, Wheels
Notes:
Before storing the jack, it should be fully collapsed, with
handle folded in.
For proper storage of vehicle jack see page 318.
Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or
rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired
immediately.
P40.10-2431-26
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened
mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the
correct mounting bolts.
12. Using the wrench, tighten the five bolts evenly,
following the sequence illustrated, until all bolts are
tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire inflation pressure
warm tires only if pressure has dropped below the
pressure listed in the table and the respective operating
conditions are taken into consideration.
A table (see fuel filler flap) lists the tire inflation
pressures specified for Mercedes-Benz recommended
tires as well as for the varying operating conditions.
An underinflated tire due to a slow leak (e.g. due to a
nail in the tire) may cause damage such as tread
separation, bulging etc. Regular tire pressure checks
(including the spare tire) at intervals of no more than
14 days are therefore essential.
Important!
Tire pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar)
per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage –
especially in the winter.
If a tire constantly loses air, it should be inspected for
damage.
The spare tire should be checked periodically for
condition and inflation. Spare tire will age and become
worn over time even if never used, and thus should be
inspected and replaced when necessary.
Example:
If garage temperature = approximately +68°F (+20°C)
and ambient temperature = approximately +32°F (0°C)
then the adjusted air pressure = specified air pressure
+3 psi (+0.2 bar).
Warning!
Tire pressures listed for light loads are minimum values
offering high driving comfort. Increased inflation
pressures for heavy loads produce favorable handling
characteristics with lighter loads and are perfectly
permissible. The ride of the vehicle, however, will
become somewhat harder.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they
are more likely to become punctured or damaged
by road debris, potholes etc. Follow recommended
inflation pressures.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified
vehicle capacity weight as indicated by the label on
the driver’s door latch post). Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Tire temperature and pressure increase with the vehicle
speed. Tire pressure should therefore only be checked
and corrected on cold tires. Correct tire pressure in
Tires, Wheels
329
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
330
Car care
Index
Battery
Battery
Warning!
Therefore, we strongly recommend that you have the
battery charge checked frequently, and corrected if
necessary, especially if you use the vehicle less than
approximately 200 miles (300 km) per month,
mostly for short distance trips, or if it is not used for
long periods of time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in
severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting, you
might get injured.
Only charge a battery with a battery charger after the
battery has been disconnected from the vehicle’s
electrical circuit.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water and seek medical help if necessary.
Always disconnect the battery negative lead first and
connect last.
When removing and connecting the battery, always
make sure that all electrical consumers are off and the
electronic key is in starter switch position 0. The
battery, its filler caps, the vent tube and the opposite
plug must always be securely installed when the vehicle
is in operation.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is
flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks
away from battery, avoid improper connection of
jumper cables, smoking etc.
Important!
Battery replacement information:
While the engine is running the battery terminal clamps
must not be loosened or detached, otherwise the
generator and other electronic components would be
damaged.
The maintenance-free battery is located in the engine
compartment on the right hand side.
The service life of the battery is dependent on its
condition of charge. The battery should always be kept
sufficiently charged, in order to last an optimum length
of time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After reconnecting the battery also set the clock
(vehicles with COMAND: see COMAND operator’s
manual) resynchronize the front seat head restraints,
the express feature of the power windows, the sliding/
pop-up roof, and the electronic stability program (see
individual settings on page 115, head restraints on
page 50, power windows on page 185, synchronizing the
sliding/pop-up roof on page 190 and electronic stability
program on page 270).
Battery recycling
Batteries contain materials that can harm the
environment with improper disposal.
Removal of filter box:
Large 12 Volt storage batteries contain lead.
Release three clamps (1) and remove filter box.
Installation of filter box:
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of
disposal.
Install filter box properly and secure with
three clamps (1).
Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old
batteries for recycling.
Notes:
The gear selector lever will remain locked in
position “P” and the electronic key could not be turned
in the starter switch, if the vehicle battery is
disconnected or discharged.
Battery
331
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
332
Car care
Index
Jump starting
Jump starting
Important!
A discharged battery can freeze at approximately +14°F
(–10°C). In that case, it must be thawed out before
jumper cables are used. Attempting to jump start a
frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing
personal injury.
Warning!
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and can lead
to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump
starting, you might get injured.
Jumper cable specifications:
• Minimum cable cross-section of 25 mm2 or
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
approximately 2 AWG
• Maximum length of 11.5 ft. (3.5 m).
If the battery is discharged, the engine should be started
with jumper cables and the (12 V) battery of another
vehicle.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is
flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or
sparks away from battery, avoid improper
connection of jumper cables, smoking etc.
Only use 12 V battery to jump start your vehicle. Jump
starting with more powerful battery could damage the
vehicle’s electrical systems, which will not be covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
The battery is located in the engine compartment on the
right hand side.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Proceed as follows:
1. Position the vehicle with the charged battery so that
the jumper cables will reach, but never let the
vehicles touch. Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
2. On both vehicles:
• Turn off engine and all lights and accessories,
except hazard warning flashers or work lights.
• Apply parking brake and shift selector lever to
position “P”.
Important!
1 Negative (–) under hood terminal
3. Clamp one end of the first jumper cable to the
positive (+) under hood terminal of the discharged
battery and the other end to the positive (+) terminal
of the charged battery. Make sure the cable clamps
do not touch any other metal parts.
2 Positive (+) under hood terminal
4. Clamp one end of the second jumper cable to the
grounded negative (–) terminal of the charged
battery and the final connection to the negative (–)
under hood terminal of the disabled vehicle.
Jump starting
333
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
334
Car care
Index
Jump starting
Important!
Note:
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful
starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
5. Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery
and run at high idle. Make sure the cables are not
on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move
when the engine is started. Allow the discharged
battery to charge for a few minutes. Start engine of
the disabled vehicle in the usual manner.
Excessive unburned fuel may damage the catalytic
converter.
6. After the engine has started, remove jumper cables
by exactly reversing the above installation
sequence, starting with the last connection made
first. When removing each clamp, make sure that it
does not touch any other metal while the other end
is still attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing the vehicle
Warning!
Important!
When towing the vehicle, please, note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and the
electronic key in starter switch position 2, the vehicle
doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear
wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground, make certain that the electronic key is in
starter switch position 2.
If the electronic key is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no
longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the
steering is locked. To unlock, remove electronic key
from starter switch and reinsert.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking. See the
individual setting menu “VEHICLE” – “AUTOMATIC
DOOR LOCK” on page 125.
Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the
properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow
cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis, frame
or suspension parts.
Notes:
The selector lever will remain locked in position “P” and
the electronic key cannot be turned in the starter switch
if the battery is disconnected or discharged. See battery
on page 330 or jump starting on page 332.
Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking, see
page 338.
Towing the vehicle
335
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
336
Car care
Index
Towing the vehicle
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper
To remove cover:
To remove cover:
Press mark on cover in direction of arrow and lift cover
off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt. The
towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located
behind the left hand trim panel in cargo area). Screw
towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug
wrench.
Press mark on cover in direction of arrow and lift cover
off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt. The
towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located
behind the left hand trim panel in cargo area). Screw
towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug
wrench.
To reinstall cover:
Fit cover and snap into place.
To reinstall cover:
Fit cover and snap into place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We recommend that the vehicle be transported using
flat bed equipment. This method is preferable to other
types of towing.
Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the braking and steering systems. In
this case, it is important to keep in mind that a
considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to
brake and steer the vehicle.
Important!
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down
vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts.
Note:
Towing restrictions for vehicles with automatic
transmission:
To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning
flasher in use, turn electronic key in starter switch to
position 2 and activate combination switch for left or
right turn signal in usual manner – only the selected
turn signal will operate.
The vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground
and the selector lever in position “N” for distances up to
30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h). The electronic key must be in starter switch
position 2.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning
flasher will operate again.
To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the
transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft
be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any
towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage.
Caution!
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the
engine must be shut off (electronic key in starter switch
position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be
engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with
sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage
radiator and supports.
Switch off the tow-away alarm (see page 44) as well as
the ESP (see page 270).
Use wheel lift, dolly, or flat bed equipment, with
electronic key in starter switch turned to position 0.
Towing the vehicle
337
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
338
Car care
Index
Towing the vehicle
Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking
To do so, open storage compartment in front of center
armrest.
Using a small coin, release the coin holder (1) and
swing it aside.
Insert a tool (2), e.g. the screw driver, into the opening
below the coin holder. While pushing the tool down,
move selector lever from position “P”.
After removal of the tool from the opening, reinstall the
coin holder.
The selector lever is locked again when moving it to
position “P”.
P27.60-2197-26
In the case of power failure the transmission selector
lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior lamps
Replacing bulbs
Warning!
Headlamp adjustment
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp
and its components. We recommend that you have
such work done by a qualified technician.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important.
Check and readjust headlamps at regular intervals and
when a bulb has been replaced.
Warning!
Notes:
Bulbs and bulb holders can be very hot. Allow the
lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
To prevent a possible electrical short circuit, switch off
lamp prior to replacing a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can
explode if you:
When replacing bulbs, install only 12 volt bulbs with
the specified watt rating.
• touch or move it when hot,
• drop the bulb,
When replacing halogen bulbs do not touch glass
portion of bulb with bare hands. Use plain paper or a
clean cloth.
• scratch the bulb.
If the newly installed bulb does not light up, switch the
lamp off and on again. If the bulb still does not light up,
have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Wear eye and hand protection.
Exterior lamps
339
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
340
Car care
Index
Exterior lamps
Headlamp assembly
1 Headlamp cover for low beam headlamp
3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2 Headlamp cover for parking and standing lamp, and
4 Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb
high beam headlamp
(Halogen type)
5 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp bulb
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulbs for high and low beam
H7 (55 W)
Turn signal lamp
1156 NA (26.9/5 W/32/4 cp)
Open hood.
Open hood.
Press the clamp and remove headlamp cover (1 or 2).
Pull electrical connector off.
Twist bulb socket (3) counterclockwise and pull out.
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and
remove.
Unclip the retainer spring and take out the bulb.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.
Reinstall bulb socket.
Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the
recess on the holder.
Clip in retainer springs and plug the connector onto the
bulb.
Parking and standing lamp
W 5W
Align headlamp cover (1 or 2) and click into place.
Open hood.
Press the clamp and remove headlamp cover (2).
Pull out bulb socket (6). Remove bulb from socket.
Xenon (optional)
Bulb for low beam
Insert new bulb in socket and push in. Reinstall bulb
socket.
Warning!
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp
and its components. We recommend that you have
such work done by a qualified technician.
Align headlamp cover (2) and click into place.
Exterior lamps
341
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
342
Car care
Index
Exterior lamps
Taillamp assemblies
Open tailgate.
Squeeze tabs together (3) and remove bulb holder.
Press the button (1) on the corresponding side and fold
down the trim panel (2).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace bulb, twist bulb socket counterclockwise, pull
out socket and remove bulb. Insert new bulb into socket,
insert socket and turn clockwise.
Insert bulb holder and close trim panel.
4 Stop lamp (P 21 W/32 cp bulb)
5 Turn signal lamp (PY 21 W bulb [yellow])
6 Backup lamp (P 21 W/32 cp bulb)
7 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)/tail, parking, standing
and side marker lamp (P 21/4 W)
Exterior lamps
343
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
344
Car care
Index
Exterior lamps
License plate lamp
Side marker lamp, front (5 W/4 cp bulb)
1
2
Loosen both securing screws (1), remove lamp and
replace tubular lamp (C 5 W/4 cp).
Carefully slide lamp towards rear (arrow 1), and remove
front end first (arrow 2).
Twist bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out.
Remove bulb from socket.
Insert new bulb in socket. Reinstall bulb socket, push in
and twist clockwise.
To reinstall lamp, set rear end of lamp in bumper and let
front end snap into place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High mounted stop lamp,
Standby bulb function
Additional turn signals on the exterior mirror
The stop lamps, dimmed, will act as a replacement lamp,
if one taillamp stops working.
The high mounted stop lamp (3rd brake lamp) is
equipped with LEDs. The additional turn signals on the
exterior mirrors are equipped with incandescent bulbs.
The left stop lamp acts as a replacement for the rear fog
lamp, if it stops working.
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center if a malfunction occurs.
The respective fog lamp, dimmed, will act as a
replacement lamp, if the left or right standing lamp
stops working.
Notes:
The multifunction display will indicate that a bulb has
failed. See malfunction and warning messages on
page 285.
Exterior lamps
345
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
346
Car care
Index
Electronic key
Changing batteries in the electronic key
2
1
3
4
P80.20-2200-26
P80.35-2028-26
1 Transmit buttons
Changing batteries
2 Lamp for battery check and function control
Move locking tab (3) in direction of right arrow and
remove mechanical key (4, left arrow).
Checking batteries
If one of the transmit buttons (1) is pressed, the battery
check lamp (2) lights up briefly – indicating that the
batteries are in order.
Change batteries if the battery check lamp (2) does not
light up briefly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
8
5
4
6
P80.35-2026-26
P80.35-2027-26
Insert mechanical key (4) in side opening (5) to open
latch. Press briefly (do not use mechanical key as lever)
to release battery compartment.
Change batteries (7), inserting new ones under contact
spring (8) with plus (+) side facing up.
Return battery compartment into housing until locked
in place and slide mechanical key back into electronic
key.
Remove mechanical key from side opening.
Carefully remove battery compartment in direction of
arrow (6).
Electronic key
347
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
348
Car care
Index
Emergency engine shut-down
Important!
Emergency engine shut-down
Batteries contain materials that can harm the
environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of
batteries is the preferred method of disposal. For
disposal, please follow manufacturer’s recommendation
on battery package.
If the engine can no longer be stopped using the
electronic key, the engine can be turned off by removing
two fuses.
For easy removal of fuses use the fuse extractor (located
in the auxiliary fuse box in cargo area behind left trim
panel) to pull out the fuses marked on the fuse chart as
“ENGINE EMERGENCY OFF”.
Replacement Battery:
Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.
The fuse chart is located in the fuse box in the
passenger compartment.
Synchronizing remote control
For fuses see page 307.
The remote control may have to be resynchronized, if
the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked.
To synchronize insert electronic key in starter switch.
The remote control should once again be operational.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel filler flap, manual release
Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof
Press button (1) and fold down trim panel (2).
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed
manually should an electrical malfunction occur.
Reach inside through opening (3) and turn release
knob (4) clockwise (arrow). Open the fuel filler flap.
The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located behind the
lens (1) of the interior overhead light.
Pry off the lens (1) using a screwdriver.
Fuel filler flap, manual release
349
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
350
Car care
Index
Emergency operation of sliding / pop-up roof
Slide both locking tabs (2) in direction of arrow, lower
rear of cover and remove.
Obtain crank (3) (supplied with vehicle) and insert
through hole.
To slide roof closed or to raise the roof at the rear:
turn crank clockwise.
Note:
Do not disconnect electrical connectors.
To slide the roof open or to lower the roof at the rear:
turn crank counterclockwise.
See page 190 for instructions on synchronizing the
sliding/pop-up roof after closing manually.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing wiper blade inserts
For safety reasons, remove electronic key from starter
switch before replacing the wiper blades, otherwise the
motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Notes:
Do not open engine hood with wiper arm folded forward.
Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the windshield
glass without a wiper blade inserted. The glass may be
scratched or broken.
Make certain that the wiper blades are properly
installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause
windshield damage.
Removal:
Fold wiper arm forward. Press safety tab down (1), push
wiper blade downward (2) and remove.
Replacing wiper blade insert
351
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
352
Car care
Index
Replacing wiper blade insert
Roof rack
Attach the roof rack only to the roof rails.
Use only those roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz to
avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
Place wiper blade on firm support. Press down both tabs
and slide (direction of arrow) the wiper blade insert out
of the retainer claws.
Installation:
Slide (direction of arrow) wiper blade insert into
retainer claws until tabs are engaged.
Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until it locks in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle washing ......................... 356
Ornamental moldings ...............357
Headlamps, taillamps,
Cup holder ...................................358
Seat belts .....................................359
Headliner and
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle .354
Power washer ..............................355
Tar stains .....................................355
Paintwork, painted body
components .................................355
Engine cleaning ..........................356
turn signal lenses ......................357
shelf below rear window ...........359
Window cleaning .......................357
Wiper blade ................................ 357
Light alloy wheels .....................358
Instrument cluster .....................358
Steering wheel and
Leather upholstery .....................359
Hard plastic trim items .............359
Plastic and rubber parts ............359
gear selector lever .....................358
Contents - Vehicle care
353
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
354
Car care
Index
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
More frequent washings are necessary to deal with
unfavorable conditions; for example, near the ocean, in
industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions), or during
winter operation.
Warning!
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow
the instructions on the particular container.
Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when
cleaning the inside.
You should check your vehicle from time to time for
stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be
repaired as soon as possible to prevent the start of
corrosion.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed
for cleaning your vehicle.
In doing so, do not neglect the underside of the vehicle.
A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the
underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged
areas need to be reundercoated.
In operation, your vehicle is subjected to varying
external influences which, if gone unchecked, can
attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and
cause lasting damage.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-
base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for
the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz
because of the possibility of incompatibility between
materials used in the production process and others
applied later.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying
climatic conditions, but also by air polution, road salt,
tar, gravel and stone chipping. Grease and oil, fuel,
coolant, brake fluid, bird droppings, insects, tree resins
etc. should be removed immediately to avoid paint
damage. Frequent washing reduces and/or eli minates
the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse
influences.
We have selected car-care products and compiled
recommendations which are specially matched to our
vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due
to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed
or repaired with the car-care products recommended
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become
more difficult to remove. A tar remover is
recommended.
The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of
your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as
well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied
when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”,
normally in 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and
washing detergent used.
Additional information can be found in the booklet titled
“Vehicle Care Guide”.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be
applied if paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding
(i.e. loss of gloss).
Power washer
When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle
always observe manufacturer’s operating instructions.
Do not apply any of these products or wax if your
vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and
provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips
from stones, vehicle doors etc.).
Caution!
Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The
intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface.
Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical
connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
355
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
356
Car care
Index
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Engine cleaning
Vehiclewashing
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to
protect electrical components and connectors from the
intrusion of water and cleaning agents.
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct
sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax
should be applied to the engine compartment after
every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control
linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any
wax.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of
water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the
ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly wipe dry with a
chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
finish.
Due to the width of the vehicle, prior to running the
vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold back the
outside mirrors to prevent them from getting damaged.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt
as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the
inner sides of the wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ornamental moldings
Window cleaning
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome-
plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. An
automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
Note:
Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove
electronic key from starter switch before cleaning the
windshield, otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz
approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use
only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses.
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or
sponge.
Wiper blades
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and
detergent solution.
Note:
For safety reasons, remove electronic key from starter
switch before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the
wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
357
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
358
Car care
Index
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Light alloy wheels
Instrument cluster
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for
regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with Mercedes-
Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush
and a strong spray of water.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Follow instructions on container.
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean
with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Note:
Use only acid-free cleaning materials. The acid could
lead to corrosion.
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat belts
Leather upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that
have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet
etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be
prevented.
The webbing must not be treated with chemical
cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and
soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above
176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Warning!
Leather Upholstery
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely
weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry
thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care. Exercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside should not become
wet.
Headliner and shelf below rear window
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
MB Tex Upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft
lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.
Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft
lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
359
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine oil additives ......................370
Air conditioner refrigerant ..........370
Brake fluid ...................................... 370
Premium unleaded gasoline .........371
Fuel requirements .........................371
Gasoline additives ......................... 372
Coolants ..........................................372
Consumer information ..................374
Uniform tire quality grading ........374
Technical data
Spare parts service ........................362
Warranty coverage .........................362
Identification labels .......................363
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............364
Technical data ................................365
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. -
capacities ...................................368
Engine oils ......................................370
Contents - Technical data
361
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
362
Car care
Index
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock
of original spare parts required for maintenance and
repair work. In addition, strategically located parts
distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts
service.
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
“warranties” printed in the Service and Warranty
Information booklet and your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any
defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following warranties:
More than 300 000 different spare parts, for
Mercedes-Benz models, are available.
1. New vehicle limited warranty
2. Emission systems warranty
3. Emission performance warranty
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are subjected to
stringent quality inspections. Each part has been
specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and
adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
4. California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont
emission control systems warranty
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare parts should
be installed.
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties,
copies of which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Important!
The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not
authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle
which damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty or compromise its durability or safety.
Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information
booklet, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Identification labels
2
1 Certification label
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
(below right front passenger seat)
Technical data
363
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
364
Car care
Index
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
5
5
3
6
4
6
1
7
4
2
3
P01.00-2220-26
3 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
4 Engine number
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Crankshaft
5 Emission control label
3 Air conditioner compressor
4 Generator (alternator)
5 Idler pulley
6 Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission control system
When ordering spare parts, please specify vehicle
identification and engine numbers.
6 Power steering pump
7 Coolant pump, fan
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data
Model
C 320 (203.2641)
Engine
112
Mode of operation
No. of cylinders
Bore
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
6
3.54 in (89.90 mm)
3.30 in (84.00 mm)
195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3)
10:1
Stroke
Total piston displacement
Compression ratio
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
215 hp/5700 rpm
(160 kW/5700 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 228 ft.lb/3000 rpm
(310 Nm/3000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
Firing order
6000 rpm
1-4-3-6-2-5
2390 mm
Poly-V-belt
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
Technical data
365
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
366
Car care
Index
Technical data
Rims — Tires
Electrical system
Model
C 320 (203.264)
Model
C 320 (203.264)
Rims (light alloy)
Wheel offset:
7J x 16 H2
1.46 in (37 mm)
Generator (alternator)
Starter motor
Battery
14 V/120 A
12V/1.7 kW
12V/100 Ah
All season tires:
Radial-ply tires
205/55 R16 91 H
Spark plugs
Bosch F 8 DPER
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2
NGK IFR 5 D 10
Winter tires:
Radial-ply tires
205/55 R16 91 H M+S
Electrode gap
Tightening torque
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)
Spare wheel
Rim (steel rim)
Wheel offset:
7J x 16 H2
1.46 in (37 mm)
Weights
All season tires:
Radial-ply tires
Roof load max.
220 lb (100 kg)
205/55 R16 91 H
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Dimensions
Model
C 320 (203.264)
178.9 in (4543 mm)
68.0 in (1728 mm)
57.7 in (1466 mm)
106.9 in (2715 mm)
58.8 in (1493 mm)
57.6 in (1464 mm)
Overall vehicle length
Overall vehicle width
Overall vehicle height
Wheel base
Track, front
Track, rear
Technical data
367
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
368
Car care
Index
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only brands tested and recommended
by us. Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your Mercedes-Benz Center.
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Recommended engine oils
Engine with oil filter
Automatic transmission
Rear axle
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Automatic transmission fluid
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
MB Power steering fluid
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
Power steering
Front wheel hubs
Brake system
approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each
approx. 0.5 US qt (0.5 l)
approx. 6.8 US qt (6.4 l)
16.4 US gal (62.0 l)
High temperature roller bearing grease
MB Brake fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system
Fuel tank
MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Premium unleaded gasoline: Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
including a reserve of
2.1 US gal (8.0 l)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Air conditioner system
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
(Never R-12)
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning system
Vehicles without headlamp
cleaning system:
MB Windshield washer concentrate1
Capacity approx. 3.2 US qt
(3.0 l)
Vehicles with headlamp
cleaning system:
Capacity approx. 6.4 US qt
(6.0 l)
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios, see
page 317.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Instruments
369
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
and controls
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
370
Car care
Index
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Engine oils
Air conditioner refrigerant
Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in
our engines. Therefore, use only engine oils
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information on
recommended brands is available in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil
is used in the air conditioner system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil,
otherwise damage to the system will occur.
Brake fluid
Please follow Service Booklet recommendations for
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in
engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake
fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of
moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely hard
operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to
the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing
the system’s efficiency.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may be
harmful to the engine operation.
The brake fluid must therefore be replaced every two
years, preferably in the spring.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil
additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
It is recommended to use only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will provide you with additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Premium unleaded gasoline
Caution!
Fuel requirements
Use only Premium unleaded meeting ASTM
standard D 439:
To maintain the engine’s durability and performance,
premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium
unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used,
follow these precautions:
The octane number (posted at the pump) must be
91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane
number and the Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2).
This is also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
• have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded
regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible,
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as
Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the
ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
exceed 10%, MTBE not to exceed 15%.
• avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration,
The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3%
plus additional cosolvents.
• do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm, if the
vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two
persons and no luggage,
• do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal
position, if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed.
Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded
gasoline, can be used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements
such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor
pressure etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
371
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
372
Car care
Index
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
Gasoline additives
Coolants
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon
build up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
recommends the use of only quality gasoline containing
additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits.
• corrosion protection,
• freeze protection,
After an extended period of using fuels without such
additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the
intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to
engine performance problems such as:
• boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point).
The cooling system was filled at the factory with a
coolant providing freeze protection to approximately
- 22°F (- 30°C) and corrosion protection.
• warm-up hesitation,
• unstable idle,
• knocking/pinging,
• misfire,
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to - 22°F (- 30°C),
the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized
cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F
(130°C).
The coolant solution must be used year round to provide
the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the
boil-over protection. You should have it replaced every
3 years.
• power loss.
Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel.
They only result in unnecessary cost, and may be
harmful to the engine operation.
To provide the important corrosion protection, the
solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze
(equals a freeze protection to approximately - 22°F
(- 30°C). If you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to
Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel
quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
approximately - 49°F (- 45°C), the engine temperature
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of
the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this
amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in
the hot southern regions), you should have the
anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The
coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring
your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for service.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB anticorrosion/
antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper
level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
The water in the cooling system must meet minimum
requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal
drinking water. If your are not sure about the water
quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Approximately freeze protection
– 35°F
(– 37°C)
– 49°F
(– 45°C)
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminium parts. The
use of aluminium components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used
in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the
aluminium parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/
antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly
shortened service life.)
4.8 US qt
(4.5 l)
5.3 US qt
(5.0 l)
Therefore the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle: Mercedes-Benz
anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities
373
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
data
Operation
Index
cluster display
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
374
Car care
Index
Consumer information
Consumer information
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
This has been prepared as required of all manufactures
of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal
Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straightahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature
Warning!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire‘s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause excessive heat build up
and possible tire failure.
Consumer information
375
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Technical
Operation
Index
cluster display
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
376
Car care
Index
Index
Audio systems .................................................................102
Cassette player ..........................................................104
CD Player ....................................................................103
Radio ...........................................................................102
Automatic central locking ..............................................39
Automatic climate control ............................................148
Activated charcoal filter ...........................................156
Adjustable air outlets,
Index
A
Adding engine oil .......................................................... 314
Airbags ..............................................................................67
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
Malfunction and warning message ........................289
Antilock brake system (ABS) .......................................268
Antitheft alarm system ...................................................43
Ashtrays ..........................................................................200
Audio system
rear passenger compartment .............................160
Air recirculation ........................................................155
Air volume, manual ..................................................153
Basic setting ...............................................................152
Defrosting ...................................................................154
Display and controls .................................................150
Dust filter ...................................................................152
Economy mode ..........................................................157
Front center console storage
Button and soft key operation ................................. 164
Cassette mode ...........................................................170
CD changer ................................................................ 175
CD mode ..................................................................... 174
Operating and display elements ............................. 162
Operating safety ........................................................ 161
Operation ................................................................... 164
Operation Audio and telephone .............................. 161
Radio mode ................................................................ 167
Telephone operation ................................................. 178
compartment ventilation .....................................159
Residual engine heat utilization .............................157
Special settings .........................................................153
Windows fogged up on the outside ........................154
Automatic transmission ............................................... 243
Fluid level ...................................................................315
Transmission selector lever,
manually unlocking ............................................ 338
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General notes ...............................................................30
Locking and unlocking with remote control ..........33
Mechanical keys ..........................................................35
Obtaining replacement keys .....................................29
Summer opening/convenience feature ...................34
Vehicle keys .................................................................28
Check regularly and before a long trip .......................276
Child seat
B
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system .....................64
Battery .............................................................................330
Block heater ....................................................................262
Brake assist system (BAS) ............................................267
Bulbs
See Replacing bulbs .................................................339
See Infant and child restraint systems ....................77
Climate control
C
Adjustable air outlets,
rear passenger compartment .............................160
Cargo tie-down rings ..................................................... 218
CD changer
Front center console storage
compartment ventilation .....................................159
See CD changer installed .........................................175
Cellular telephone ......................................................... 219
Center console ..................................................................24
Central locking switch ....................................................38
Central locking system ................................................... 31
Automatic central locking .........................................39
Central locking switch ...............................................38
Choosing global or selective mode ...........................33
Doors .............................................................................36
Windows fogged up on the outside ........................154
Closing the tailgate ..........................................................42
COMAND, radio and telephone .................................. 226
Combination switch .......................................................142
Control and operation of radio transmitters ............. 226
Coolant level ...................................................................315
Coolant temperature gauge .......................................... 131
Cruise control ................................................................ 264
Cup holder .......................................................................198
Index
377
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
378
Car care
Index
Index
Emergency unlocking the tailgate .................................41
Engine oil consumption ................................................136
Engine oil level indicator ..............................................135
D
Dashboard .........................................................................22
Door control panel ...........................................................20
Door entry lamps ........................................................... 192
Drive sensibly - Save Fuel ............................................253
Express opening and closing
(power windows) .......................................................186
Exterior lamp switch .....................................................137
Daytime running lamp mode ..................................139
Exterior lamps ............................................................... 339
E
Additional turn signals
on the exterior mirror ........................................ 345
Easy-entry/exit feature ...................................................45
Electrical outlet ..............................................................209
Electronic key ...................................................................29
Changing batteries ...................................................346
Electronic main key
Synchronizing remote control ................................348
Electronic stability program (ESP) ..............................270
Emergency call
See Tele Aid ...............................................................228
Emergency engine shut-down .....................................348
Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof ............349
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) .........................66
Emergency unlocking in case of accident ...................39
Bulbs for high and low beam ..................................341
Headlamp assembly ................................................. 340
High mounted stop lamp ......................................... 345
License plate lamps ................................................. 344
Parking and standing lamp .....................................341
Replacing bulbs ........................................................ 339
Side marker lamp, front .......................................... 344
Taillamp assemblies ................................................ 342
Turn signal lamp .......................................................341
Exterior mirror adjustment ............................................85
Exterior mirror, front passenger side,
parking position ..........................................................86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F
H
First aid kit .....................................................................306
Flat tire
Hazard warning flasher switch ...................................147
Head restraints
See Changing wheels ...............................................324
Flexible service system (FSS) ...................................... 132
Front airbags ....................................................................67
Front center console storage
compartment ventilation .........................................159
Front seat adjustment .....................................................46
Fuel filler flap, manual release ...................................349
Fuel reserve warning ....................................................282
Fuse box ..........................................................................308
Fuses ................................................................................307
Rear seat .......................................................................53
Head restraints, front seats
Removal and installation ...........................................50
Headlamp cleaning system ........................................... 141
Headlamp mode ..............................................................138
Heated seats ......................................................................52
High beams
See Combination switch ..........................................142
I
Identification labels ...................................................... 363
Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ................ 278
Individual settings ......................................................... 115
"CONVENIENCE" ......................................................128
"INSTRUMENT CLUSTER" ....................................... 118
"LIGHTING" ................................................................122
"VEHICLE" .................................................................125
Infant and child restraint systems ................................77
Child seat mounts .......................................................81
Installation ...................................................................79
G
Garage door opener .......................................................221
Global locking
See Central locking system ....................................... 31
Glove box ......................................................................... 195
Index
379
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
380
Car care
Index
Index
Information call
L
See Tele Aid ...............................................................228
Instrument cluster ...........................................................92
Instruments and controls ............................................... 18
Center console .............................................................24
Dashboard ....................................................................22
Door control panel ......................................................20
Overhead control panel .............................................. 21
Interior ............................................................................ 194
Interior lighting ............................................................. 191
Lamps, exterior
Side marker lamp, front .......................................... 344
Lighter ............................................................................ 202
Loading instructions ......................................................217
Locator lighting .............................................................. 141
Locking the vehicle with remote control .....................33
Low beams
See Exterior lamps ................................................... 339
M
J
Maintenance .................................................................. 227
Malfunction and warning messages
STEERING GEAR OIL ............................................... 296
Malfunction/warning message memory .................... 113
Mechanical key ..........................................................28, 35
Memory function .............................................................89
Jack ...................................................................................320
Jump starting ..................................................................332
K
Keys, changing battery .................................................346
Keys, vehicle .....................................................................28
Mirror, exterior, parking position,
front passenger side ...................................................86
Multicontour seat .............................................................51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multifunction display ......................................................96
Coolant temperature ................................................. 100
Engine oil level indicator .........................................100
FSS ..............................................................................100
Individual settings .....................................................115
Tire inflation pressure monitor .............................. 100
Trip and main odometer .......................................... 100
Vehicle speed ............................................................. 100
Multifunction steering wheel ........................................96
P
Panic button ......................................................................35
Parcel net in front passenger footwell ....................... 203
Parcel net in trunk ........................................................ 208
Parking brake ................................................................ 252
Power windows ...............................................................185
Blocking of rear door window operation ...............187
Express opening and closing ..................................186
Opening and closing ...................................................34
Synchronizing power windows ...............................187
Problems with your vehicle ............................................14
Product information ..........................................................7
N
Navigation system ...........................................................110
Night security illumination .........................................140
R
O
Radio
See Radio mode .........................................................167
Rain sensor .....................................................................143
On-board diagnostic system .........................................278
Opening the tailgate ........................................................40
Overhead control panel ................................................... 21
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air outlets ................................................160
Rear window defroster ..................................................158
Rear window wiper/washer .........................................146
Removal and installation
of front seat head restraints ......................................50
Index
381
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
382
Car care
Index
Index
Replacement keys
Selective locking
Obtaining .....................................................................29
Replacing bulbs ..............................................................339
Replacing wiper blade insert .......................................351
Reporting Safety Defects ................................................ 15
REST ................................................................................. 157
Retractable luggage cover and partition net ............. 210
Roadside assistance call
See Central locking system .......................................31
Setting the audio volume ..............................................130
Side impact airbags .........................................................70
Side marker lamp .......................................................... 344
Ski sack .......................................................................... 203
Sliding/pop-up roof ........................................................188
Opening and closing ...................................................34
Synchronizing ...........................................................190
SOS-call
See Tele Aid ...............................................................228
Roof rack .........................................................................352
See Tele Aid .............................................................. 228
Spare wheel
S
bolts ............................................................................ 323
Spare wheel, storage compartment .............................318
Split rear bench seat ......................................................213
Standby bulb function .................................................. 345
Start lock-out .....................................................................30
Starter switch ................................................................. 240
Starting and turning off the engine ........................... 242
STEERING GEAR OIL - malfunction
and warning messages ............................................ 296
Steering lock
See starter switch ..................................................... 240
Steering wheel
Seat belt nonusage warning system .............................57
Seat belts ...........................................................................56
Fastening ......................................................................59
Operation ..................................................................... 61
Unfastening .................................................................. 61
Warning lamp ............................................................284
Seat belts and integrated restraint system ..................56
Seats
Front seat adjustment ................................................46
Heated seat ..................................................................52
Multicontour seat ........................................................ 51
Power seat ....................................................................47
Easy-entry/exit feature ..............................................45
Steering wheel adjustment (electrical) .........................83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage compartment under trunk floor ....................209
Storage compartments and armrests .......................... 194
Storing mirror positions .................................................85
Storing seat positions ......................................................48
Stowing things in the vehicle ......................................307
Sun visors ....................................................................... 193
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .........................65
Telephone, general ........................................................ 220
Telephones and two-way radios .................................. 226
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) ............................... 227
Tire inflation pressure ................................................. 329
Tool kit ............................................................................. 319
Tow-away alarm ................................................................44
Towing the vehicle ........................................................ 335
Transmission selector lever,
manually unlocking ................................................. 338
Trip computer ..................................................................111
T
Tailgate ..............................................................................40
Technical data ................................................................365
Tele Aid ...........................................................................228
Emergency calls ........................................................229
Information ................................................................233
Initiating an emergency call ...................................231
Roadside Assistance .................................................232
Telephone ........................................................................105
Incoming call ............................................................. 109
Redialing .................................................................... 107
Telephone book ......................................................... 105
U
Unlocking the vehicle with remote control .................33
V
Vanity mirrors ................................................................193
Vehicle keys ......................................................................28
Vehicle tools .................................................................... 319
Index
383
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
Operation
DrDiovwinnlgoad from Www.Somanuals.com. PAlrl aMcatniucaalsl Sheianrtcsh And DoCwanlroacda.re
Index
data
Instruments
and controls
Instrument
cluster display
Technical
data
Operation
Driving
Practical hints
384
Car care
Index
Index
W
Warning lamps
See Malfunction and indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster ....................................278
What you should know at the gas station .................. 274
Wheels .............................................................................321
Where to find it ................................................................ 13
Window curtain airbag ...................................................70
Windows
See Power windows .................................................. 185
Windshield washer system .......................................... 316
Wiper blade
Replacing insert ........................................................351
Wiper operation
See Combination switch .......................................... 142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your
vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com.
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper
or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this
Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.00-3155-26
Press time 10/23/01
GSP/SIP
Printed in Germany
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order No. 6515 0088 13 Part No. 203 584 21 96 USA Edition B 2002
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OOKSPINE for Operator’s Manual
5/8 in. (1.6 cm)
3.5“ (8.9 cm)
203
Operator’s Manual C-Class
Please ensure the correct position of model code and model name
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|